HP Compaq NC6400 Maintenance And Service Manual
Main tenan ce and Ser vice Gu id e HP C om paq nc64 00 Not ebook P C Doc ument P art Number : 406 84 7 -001 May 2006 This guide is a troubleshooting reference used for maintaining and servicing the computer . It pro vides comprehensiv e information on identifying computer features, components, and spare parts; troubleshooting computer problems; and performing computer disassembly procedures.
© Copyright 2006 He wlett-Packard De velopment Compan y , L.P . Microsoft and W indows are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Core are tradem arks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used b y He wlett-Packard Compan y under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . Ja v a is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide HP Co mpaq nc6400 Not ebook PC F irst E d iti on: May 2006 Document P ar t Number: 406 84 7 -001
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide iii Cont ent s 1 Product Description 1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2 1.2 Resetting the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â4 1.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5 1.4 External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â6 1.5 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â24 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Selecting from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Selecting from the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Selecting from the Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Selecting from the System Configuration Menu. . . . 2â5 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6
i v Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Con ten ts 3 Illustrated Parts Catalog 3.1 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 3.2 Computer Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 3.3 Display Assembly Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â16 3.4 Plastics Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â18 3.5 Cable Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â20 3.6 Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â21 3.7 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â22 3.8 Sequential Part Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â25 4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries 4.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 4.2 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Plastic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 4.3 Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . . 4â3 4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.5 Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . 4â5 4.6 Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6 4.7 Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â7
Cont ent s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de v 5 Removal and Replacement Procedures 5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2 5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . 5â5 5.4 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â7 5.5 Computer Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â11 5.6 Bluetooth Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â12 5.7 External Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â14 5.8 Mini Card WLAN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â17 5.9 MultiBay II Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â21 5.10 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â23 5.11 RTC Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â28 5.12 Internal Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â29 5.13 Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â31 5.14 Mini Card WWAN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â33 5.15 Switch Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â35 5.16 Power Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â37 5.17 Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â38 5.18 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â39 5.19 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â42 5.20 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â44 5.21 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â55 5.22 PC Card/Digital Media Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â61 5.23 Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â64 5.24 Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â66 5.25 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â68 5.26 MultiBay II Eject Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â77
v i Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Con ten ts 6 Specifications A Screw Listing B Backup and Recovery C Display Component Recycling D Connector Pin Assignments E Power Cord Set Requirements Index
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â1 1 Pr oduc t D esc ription The HP Compaq nc6400 Notebook PC of fers advanced modularity , Intel® Core⢠Duo and Core Solo processors, and extensi ve multimedia support. HP Compaq nc6 400 Notebook P C
1â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Pr oduct Desc ription 1.1 F e a t u r e s â The follo wing processors, varying b y computer model: â Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.17-GHz) processor â Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor â Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor â Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor â Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.66-GHz) processor â 14.1-inch, WXGA , TFT (1440 à 900) and 14.1-inch, WXGA, TFT (1440 à 900) display , with o ver 16.8 million colors, v arying by computer model â 100-, 80-, 60-, and 40-GB high-capacity hard dri ve, v arying by computer model â 256-MB DDR2 synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) at 533 MHz and 667 MHz, expandable to 4.0 GB â Microsoft® W indo ws® XP Professional â Full-size W indo ws keyboard with numeric k eypad â T ouchPad and pointing stick pointing de vices, including a dedicated vertical scroll re gion â Integrated 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet local area network (LAN) netw ork interface card (NIC) with RJ-45 jack â Integrated high-speed 56K modem with RJ-11 jack â Integrated wireless support for Mini Card IEEE 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g W ireless LAN (WLAN) de vice â Support for one T ype I or T ype II PC Card slot, with support for both 32-bit (CardBus) and 16-bit PC Cards, v arying by computer model
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â3 â External 90- and 65-watt A C adapters with 3-wire power cord, v arying by computer model â 8-cell and 4-cell Li-Ion batteries â Stereo speakers â V olume up, v olume mute, and v olume do wn b uttons â Support for the follo wing optical driv es: â D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-Layer Combo Dri ve â D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Dri ve â D VD-R OM dri ve â Connectors: â Accessory battery â Audio-in (microphone) â Audio-out (headphone) â Digital Media Slot â Docking connector â External monitor â IEEE 1394 â RJ-11 (modem) â RJ-45 (network) â S-V ideo-out â SmartPo w er â Three Uni versal Serial Bus (USB) v . 2.0
1â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Pr oduct Desc ription 1 .2 R eset tin g t he Com pu ter If the computer you are servicing has an unkno wn password, follo w the steps below to reset the passw ord. These steps also clear CMOS. â The follo wing steps will not clear an unknown passw ord if the stringent security option has been enabled in the BIOS. If stringent security is enabled, the system board must be replaced to reset an unkno wn password. Refer to Section 5.21, âT op Cov er , â for more information on replacing the system board. Before replacing the system board, perform the steps belo w to make sure stringent security has been properly enabled. Enabling stringent security provides enhanced pr otection for the po wer-on password and administrator passw ord and other forms of po wer-on authorization. Stringent security is enabled/disabled by accessing the P assword Options menu in the Computer Setup utility . Refer to Section 2.1, âComputer Setup, â for more information. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3, âPreparing the Computer for Disassembly , â for more information). 2. Remov e the real-time clock (R TC) battery (refer to Section 5.11, âR TC Battery , â for more information on removing and replacing the R TC battery). 3. W ait approximately 5 minutes. 4. Replace the R TC battery and reassemble the computer . 5. Connect A C po wer to the computer . Do not reinsert any batteries at this time. 6. T urn on the computer . All passwords and all CMOS settings ha ve been cleared.
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â5 1. 3 P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t The computer comes with po wer management features that extend battery operating time and conserv e power . The computer supports the follo wing power management features: â Standby â Hibernation â Setting customization by the user â Hotke ys for setting the le vel of performance â Battery calibration â Lid switch standby/resume â Po wer button â Adv anced Configuration and Po wer Management (A CPM) compliance
1â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Pr oduct Desc ription 1 .4 Ex ternal C ompon ents The external components on the front of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-1. F ront C omponents Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components Item Component Function 1 Wireless light On: An integrat ed wireless de vice, such as a wireless local area network (LAN) device and/or a Bluetooth® de vice, is tur ned on. 2P o w e r l i g h t â On: The computer is on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby . â Blinking rapidly: An HP Smar t A C Adapter with a higher pow er rating should be connected. â Off: The computer is o ff or in hiber nation.
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â7 3 Batter y light â Amber : A batter y is charging. â Green: A batter y is close to full charge capacity . â Blinking amber : A batter y that is the only av ailable po wer source has reached a low-battery condition. When the batter y reaches a critical lo w-batter y condition, the batter y light begins blinking more quickly . â Off: If the computer is connected to an e xter nal power source , the light is tur ned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not connected to an e xter nal power source , the light is tur ned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. 4D r i v e l i g h t â Blinking green: The hard driv e or optical drive is being accessed. â Amber : HP Mobile Data Protection has temporarily par k ed the hard drive. 5 Infrared por t Provides wireless comm unication between the computer and an optional IrD A-compliant device . 6 Digital Media Slot Suppor ts Secure Digital (SD) Memor y Cards and MultiMediaCards (MMC). 7 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound. 8 Displa y release latch Opens the computer . Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Pr oduct Desc ription The external components on the right side of the computer are sho w n belo w and described in T able 1-2. R ight-Si de Com ponents
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â9 Ta b l e 1 - 2 Right-Side Components Item Component Function 1 Smar t card slot Suppor ts optional smar t cards and Jav a⢠Cards. 2 MultiBa y II device Suppor ts an op tical disc. The type of optical drive v ar ies by computer model. 3 USB por t Connects USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cable , or connects an optional Exter nal MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBa y II must also be connected to an e x ternal power source . 4 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an optional network cable. 5 RJ-11 (modem) jac k Conn ects the modem cab le.
1â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The external components on the left side of the computer are sho w n belo w and described in T able 1-3. Lef t -S ide Comp on en ts
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â11 Ta b l e 1 - 3 Left-Side Components Item Component Function 1 Exhaust v ent Provides airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o pre vent o verheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as an adjoining printer , or a soft surface , such as pillows or thic k r ugs or clothing, to blo ck ai r fl ow . 2 USB por ts (2) Connect USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cab le, or connect an optional External MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBay II must also be connected to an e xter nal pow er source. 3A u d i o - i n (microphone) jack Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo arr a y microphone, or monaural microphone . 4A u d i o - o u t (headphone) jack Produces computer s ound when connected to optional pow er stereo speakers , headphones, ear b uds, a headset, or tele vision audio . 5 PC Card slot Suppor ts optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Cards.
1â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The external components on the rear panel of the computer are sho w n belo w and described in T able 1-4. Re a r P a n e l Co mp o n en t s
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â13 T able 1-4 Rear P anel Components Item Component Function 1 Security cable slot Attaches an op tional security cable to the computer . Ã Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents ma y not prev ent a product from being mishandled or stolen. 2 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y . 3 Smar t adapter power connector Connects an A C adap ter or an optional pow er adapter . 4 S-Video-out jack Connects an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card. 5 Exter nal monitor por t Connects an optional V GA external monitor or projector .
1â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The standard ke yboard components of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-5. St andar d K e yboar d Components
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â15 T able 1-5 Standar d Ke yboard Components Item Component Function 1 fn ke y Ex e cutes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function ke y or the esc key . 2 caps lock ke y Enables caps loc k and tur ns on the caps loc k light. 3 f1 to f12 ke ys (12) P erf or m system and application tasks. When combined with the fn key , s ever al ke ys and buttons perf or m additional tasks as hotk eys . 4 num lock ke y Enables n umeric lock, tur ns on the embedded numeric ke ypad, and tur ns on the num loc k light. 5 Embedded ke ypad In Windo ws, can be used lik e the keys on an e xter nal numeric ke ypad. 6 Arrow k eys Mov es the cursor around the screen. 7W i n d o w s applications ke y In Windows , displays a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . 8 Windows logo k ey In Window s , displa ys the Windows Star t menu.
1â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The computer top components are sho wn below and described in T able 1-6. To p C o m p o n e n t s
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â17 T able 1-6 T op Components Item Component Function 1 P ow er button When the computer is: â Off , press to tur n on the computer . â On, briefly press to initiate hiber nation. â In standb y , br iefly press to resume from standby . â In hiber nation, briefly press to restore from hiber nation. If the system has st opped responding and Windows shutdo wn procedures cannot be used, press and hold f or 5 seconds to tur n off the computer . 2 Inf o Center button Launches In f o Center , which enables y ou to open v arious software solutions. 3 Wireless button T ur ns the wireless functionality on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 4 Presentation button T ur ns on the presentation feature . 5 V olume mute b utton Mutes or restores speaker v olume. 6 V olume down b utton Decreases speaker v olume. 7 V olume up bu tton Increases speaker v olume.
1â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The computer top components are sho wn below and described in T able 1-7. To p C o m p o n e n t s
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â19 T able 1-7 T op Components Item Component Function 1P o w e r l i g h t â On: The computer is on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby . â Blinking rapidly: An A C adapter with a higher pow er rating should be connected. â Off: The computer is off or in hiber nation. 2 Wireless light On: An integrat ed wireless de vice, such as a wireless local area network (LAN) de vice and/or a Bluetooth® de vice, is tur ned on. 3 Caps lock light On: caps lock is on. 4 Num loc k light On: num lock or the numeric ke ypad is on. 5 Finger print reader Allo ws a finger print logon to Windows instead of using a pass word.
1â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The computer pointing de vice components are sho wn below and described in T able 1-8. P ointing De vi ce Components
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â21 T able 1-8 P ointing Device Components Item Component Function 1 P ointing stick Mo ves the pointer and selects or activ ates items on the screen. 2 P ointing stick b utton s Function lik e the left, middle, and right buttons on an e xter nal mouse. 3 T ouchP ad Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Ca n be set to perf or m other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clic king. 4 T ouchP ad buttons Function like the left, middle , and r ight buttons on an e xter nal mouse. 5 T ouchP ad scroll zone Scrolls up or down.
1â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The external components on the bottom of the computer are sho w n belo w and described in T able 1-9. Bottom Components Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components Item Component Function 1 Batter y ba y Holds the batter y . 2 Doc king connector Connects the computer to an optional doc king de vice. 3 Batter y release latches (2) Relea se the batter y from the batter y ba y . 4 Accessor y batter y connector Connects an optional HP Ultra-Capacity Batter y or HP Extended Lif e Batter y .
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â2 3 5 Exhaust v ents Pro vides airflow to cool inter nal components. Ã T o prev ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as an adjoining printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillows or thic k rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow . 6 Hard drive ba y Holds the primar y hard dr iv e. 7 Memor y module compar tment Contains one memor y slot that suppor ts replaceable memory modules. 8 Bluetooth compar tment Contain s a Bluetooth de vice (select computer models only). 9 Serial number Identifies the computer . This number is needed when contacting customer suppor t. 10 Mini Card compar tment Holds an optional wireless LAN de vice. Ã T o prev ent an unresponsive system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice author ized f or use in your computer b y the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in your country . If you install a de vice and then receive a warning message, remov e the de vice to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription 1. 5 D e s i g n O v e r v i e w This section presents a design ov erview of k ey parts and features of the computer . Refer to Chapter 3, âIllustrated Parts Catalog, â to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, âRemo v al and Replacement Procedures, â for disassembly steps. The system board provides the follo wing de vice connections: â Audio â Display â Hard dri ve â Intel Core Duo and Core Solo processors â K eyboard and T ouchPad â Memory modules â Mini Card module â PC Card à CA UTION: T o pr operl y v entilate the compute r , allo w at least a 7 .6 -cm (3-inc h) clear ance on the left and ri ght side s of the com puter . The computer uses an electric fan for v entilation. The fan is controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to turn on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These conditions are af fected by high external temperatures, system po wer consumption, power management/battery conserv ation conf igurations, battery fast char gi ng, and software. Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on the left side of the computer .
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â1 2 T roubl e shooting à W ARNI NG: Only au thor i z ed techni ci ans tr ained by HP should r epair this equipmen t . All tr oubleshooting and r epair procedur es ar e detailed to allo w only subas sembl y-/module -lev el repair . Because of the comple xity of the indi vidual boar ds and subass emblie s, do not attempt to mak e repair s at the component le v el or modif icati ons to an y printed w iring boar d. Impr oper repair s can c r eate a safety ha z ard . An y indicati on of component r eplacement or pr inted w iring boar d modif icati on may v oid an y w arr ant y or e xc hange allo wance s. 2. 1 C omp uter Setu p Computer Setup is a system information and customization utility that can be used e ven when the operating system is not working or will not load. This utility includes settings that are not a v ailable in W indo ws. Using C ompu ter Setup Information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security , Diagnostics, or System Conf iguration menus: 1. T urn on or restart the computer . Press f10 while the F10 = R OM-Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer-left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, use the cursor control ke ys to na vigate to the System Conf iguration menu. â T o vie w navig ation information, press f1 . â T o return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc .
2â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide T r oublesho oting 2. Select the File , Security , Diagnostics, or System Conf iguration menu. 3. T o close Computer Setup and restart the computer: â Select File > Sa ve changes and exit , and then press enter . â or â â Select File > Ignore changes and exit, and then press enter . â or â â Select File > Restore defaults, and then press enter . 4. When you are prompted to conf irm your action, press f10 . Sele c ti n g f r om the F ile Me nu Ta b l e 2 - 1 File Menu Select T o Do This System Inf or mation â Vie w identification information about the computer , processor , memor y and cache size , and system ROM. â Vie w BIOS re vision, ke yboard controller v ersion, and batter y serial number inf or mation.
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â3 Selec ting fr om t he Securit y Menu Ta b l e 2 - 2 Security Menu Select T o Do This Setup P assw ord Enter , change, or delete an Setup pass word. P ow e r-On P ass word Enter , change, or delete a po wer-on pass word. P assw ord Options (P assw ord options can be selected only when a pow er-on pass word has been set.) Enable/disab le: â Stringent secur ity . â Requirement of pass word on restar t. DriveLoc k P assw ords Enable/disab le Dr iv eLock; change a DriveLoc k user or master pass word. â DriveLock Settings are accessible only when you enter Comput er Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. Smar t Card Secur ity Enab le/disable smart card power-on suppor t. â A setup password must be established to use this feature. TPM Embedded Security Enable/disab le: â Embedded security device state . â P ow er-on authenti cation suppor t. â A utomatic Dr iveLoc k suppor t. System IDs Estab lish: â Notebook asset trac king number . â Notebook ownership tags . Disk Sanitizer Estab lish f ast, optimum, or custom settings f or disk sanitizing. *Not applicable to SuperDisk LS-120 driv es.
2â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide T r oublesho oting Selec ting fr om th e Diagnostic s Menu Ta b l e 2 - 3 Diagnostics Men u Select T o Do This HDD Self-T est Options Run a quick co mprehensiv e self test on hard drives in the system that suppor t the test f eatures. Memor y Check Run a quick co mprehensiv e test on system memor y on the f ollowing categories: â W alking 0s â W alking 1s â High Address line testing â Alter nate P atter n testing
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â5 Selec ting from t he S y s tem Con figu rat ion Men u Ta b l e 2 - 4 System Configuration Menu Select T o Do This Language Change the Comp uter Setup language. Boot Options Enable/disab le Mult iBoot, which sets a star tup sequence that can includ e most bootab le devices and media in the system. De vice Configurations Enable/disab le: â Swap Fn / Ctrl k eys . â USB legacy suppor t. â BIOS DMA data transf ers. â F an Alwa ys on while on AC P ower . â Data Ex ecution Prev ention. â LAN P ow er sav e. Built-In De vice Options Enable/disab le: â Embedded WLAN De vice Radio. â Embedded Bluetooth De vice Radio. â LAN/WLAN Switching. â W ake on LAN from Off . P or t Options Enable/disab le: â USB P or t. â 1394 P or t. â CardBus Slot.
2â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide T r oublesho oting 2.2 T roubleshootin g Flo wc h arts Ta b l e 2 - 5 T roub leshooting Flowc har ts Over vie w Flowchart Description 2.1 âFlowchar t 2.1âInitial T roubleshootingâ 2.2 âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P o wer , P ar t 1â 2.3 âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P o wer , P ar t 2â 2.4 âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P o wer , P ar t 3â 2.5 âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P o wer , P ar t 4â 2.6 âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , P ar t 1â 2.7 âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , P ar t 2â 2.8 âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Do c king De vice (if applicable)â 2.9 âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loadingâ 2.10 âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1â 2.11 âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 2â 2.12 âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3â 2.13 âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Disk ette Dr iv eâ 2.14 âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Driveâ 2.15 âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , P ar t 1â 2.16 âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , P ar t 2â 2.17 âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De viceâ 2.18 âFlowchar t 2.18âNonfunctioning K eyboardâ 2.19 âFlowchar t 2.19âNonfunctioning P ointing De viceâ 2.20 âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connectionâ
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â7 Flo wc har t 2. 1âIniti al T roub leshootin g Connecting to network or modem? Begin troubleshooting. Is there power? Is the OS loading? Is there video? (no boot) Is there sound? Beeps, LEDs, or error messages? Keyboard/ pointing device working? Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â All drives working? Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N End N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchart 2.18âNonfunc- tioning K eyboardâ or âFlowchart 2.19âNonfunc- tioning P ointing De vice. â Check LED board, speaker connections. Go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2.2âNo P o w er , P ar t 1 1. Reset the power cables in the docking device and at the AC outlet. 2. Be sure the AC power source is active. 3. Be sure that the power strip is working. Done Remove from docking device (if applicable). Po we r u p on batter y power? Po we r u p on AC power? Power up in docking device? Po we r up on batter y power? Po we r u p in docking device? Done Reset power .* Reset power .* Po we r u p on AC power? N Y Y N N Y N N Y Y YN 1. On select computer models, there is a separate reset button. 2. On select computer models, the computer can be reset using th e standby switch and either the lid switch or the main power swit ch. *NOTES Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â No power (power LED is off).
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â9 Flo wc har t 2.3âNo P o w er , P ar t 2 Continued from âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Visually check for debris in batter y socket and cl ean if necessary . Done N Y Po we r o n ? Check batter y by recharging it, moving it to another computer , or replacing it. Po we r o n ? Done Y Replace power supply (if applicable). N Po we r o n ? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â
2â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2.4âNo P o w er , P ar t 3 Continued from âFlowchart 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Reseat AC adapter in computer and at po wer sourc e. Internal or external AC adapter? Done Done Done Done Po we r o n ? Po we r o n ? Po we r o n ? Plug directly into AC outlet. Po we r L E D on? Po we r o u tl et active? T r y different outlet. Replace external AC adapter . Replace power cord. Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N External Internal Go to âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , Pa r t 4 . â
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â11 Flowc ha r t 2.5 âN o P o wer , P a r t 4 Y N Continued from âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Reseat loose components and boards and replace damaged items. Open computer . Loose or damaged parts? Y Close computer and retest. Po we r on ? Done N Replace the following items (if applicable). Check computer operation after each replacement: 1. Internal DC-DC converter* 2. Internal AC adapter 3. Processor board* 4. System board* *NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent shorting out among components.
2â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2.6âNo Vid eo, P ar t 1 A N Stand-alone or docking device? No video. Replace the following one at a time. T est after each replacement. 1. Cable between computer and computer display (if applicable) 2. Display 3. System board Internal or external display*? Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Docking Device Internal Stand-alone External Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Y Press lid swi tc h to ensu re operation. Video OK? Done Y N Video OK? Done Done N Check for bent pins on cable. Tr y another display . Internal and external video OK? Replace system board. YY N N *NOTE: T o change from internal to external display , use the hotkey combination. Y Go to âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , Pa r t 2 . â
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â13 Flo wc har t 2.7âNo Vid eo, P ar t 2 Y N Continued from âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Done Adjust external monitor display . Video OK? Adjust display brightness. Video OK? Video OK? Done Done Check that computer is properly seated in docking device, for bent pins on cable, and for monitor connection. Go to âA â in âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Check brightness of external monitor . T r y another external monitor . Internal and external video OK? Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â Y Y Y N N N Remove computer from docking device, if connected.
2â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting F lo w cha rt 2 . 8 â No nf un cti on in g D ock in g D e v ic e (i f appl icable) Y N Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. N T est replacement docking device with new computer . Check voltage setting on docking device. Reset monitor cable connector at docking device. Reinstall computer into docking device. Docking device operating? Docking device operating? Replace docking device. Done Done Y Nonfunctioning docking device.
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â15 Flo wc har t 2.9âNo O peratin g S y stem (OS) Loadin g No OS loading from hard drive, go to âFlowchart 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1. â Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. No OS loading.* *NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always check cable connections, cable ends, and drives for bent or damaged pins. No OS loading from diskette drive, go to âFlowchart 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive, go to âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Drive. â No OS loading from network, go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2. 1 0âN o OS Loadin g , Hard Driv e, Pa r t 1 Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Done N OS not loading from hard drive. Nonsystem disk message? Go to âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Reseat external hard drive. OS loading? Done Boot from CD? Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Boot from hard drive? Boot from diskette? Change boot priority through the Setup Utility and reboot. Boot from hard drive? Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Check the Setup utility for correct booting order .
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â17 Flowc h ar t 2. 1 1âN o O S Lo ad in g , H a rd D riv e, Pa r t 2 Load OS using Operating System disc (if applicable). Continued from âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 1. â Reseat hard drive. Done CD or diskette in drive? 1. Replace hard drive. 2. Replace system board. Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Format hard drive and bring to ab o o t a b l e C:\ prompt. Create partition, and then format hard drive to bootable C:\ prompt. Boot from diskette drive? Remove diskette and reboot. Y N Boot from hard drive? Y N Y N Hard drive accessible? Y N Hard drive accessible? Done Run FDISK. Y N Hard drive partitioned? Hard drive formatted? Y N Y N Computer booted? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 3. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3. â
2â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2. 1 2âN o OS Loadin g, H ard Driv e, Pa r t 3 Y System files on hard drive? Continued from âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Clean virus. Done N Install OS and reboot. Virus on hard drive? OS loading from hard drive? Y N Y N Y N Diagnostics on diskette? Replace hard drive. Run diagnostics and follow recommendations. Run SCANDISK and check for bad sectors. Can bad sectors be fixed? Replace hard drive. Y N Y N Fix ba d sectors. Boot from hard drive? Replace hard drive. Done
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â19 Flo wc har t 2. 1 3âNo OS Loadin g , Disk et te Driv e Done Y N Reseat diskette drive. OS not loading from diskette drive. Done Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N OS loading? Nonsystem disk message? Bootable diskette in drive? Install bootable diskette and reboot computer . Check diskette for system files. Tr y d i f f e r e n t diskette. 1. Replace diskette drive. 2. Replace system board. Nonsystem disk error? OS loading? Boot from another device? Enable drive and cold boot computer . Is diskette drive boot order correct? Change boot priority using the Setup Utility . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Diskette drive enabled in the Setup Utility? Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
2â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2. 1 4âNo OS Load ing , Opti cal Driv e Y Done N Bootable disc in drive? Disc in drive? No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. Install bootable disc and reboot computer . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Install bootable disc. Boots from CD or DVD? Boots from CD or DVD? T r y another bootable disc. Booting from another device? Booting order correct? Correct boot order using the Setup Utility . Done Reseat drive. Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â21 Flo wc har t 2. 1 5âNo Au dio, P ar t 1 No audio. N Computer in docking device (if applicable)? Internal audio? Audio? Done Undock Audio? Done T urn up audio internally or externally . Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Y Y Y N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Replace the docking device.
2â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2. 1 6 âNo Audio, P ar t 2 YN Continued from âFlowchart 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Reload audio drivers. Audio driver in OS configured? Audio? Y Y Y N N N Correct drivers for application? Connect to external speaker . Load drivers and set configuration in OS. Audio? Done Replace audio board and speaker connections in computer (if applicable). 1. Replace internal speakers. 2. Replace audio board (if applicable). 3. Replace system board.
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â2 3 Flo wc har t 2. 1 7 âNonfunc tioning D e vice Done Any physical device detected? Y N Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the computer and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins or other damage. Reseat device. Clear CMOS. Done Fix o r replace broken item. Nonfunctioning device. Reattach device. Close computer , plug in power , and reboot. Device boots properly? Go to âFlowchart 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Device boots properly? Replace hard drive. Replace diskette drive. Replace NIC. If integrated NIC, replace system board. Y N Y N
2â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2. 1 8âNonfunc tionin g K e yboard Y N OK? Keyboard not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external keyboard. Reseat internal keyboard connector (if applicable). Replace internal keyboard or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â2 5 Flo wc har t 2. 1 9âN onfunc tioning P ointing De vice Y N OK? Pointing device not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external pointing device. Reseat internal pointing device connector (if applicable). Replace internal pointing device or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
2â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2.20âNo Net w ork/Modem Con nectio n Y Disconnect all power from the computer and open. No network or modem connection. N Done Digital line? Network or modem jack active? Replace jack or have jack activated. Connect to nondigital line. NIC/modem configured in OS? Reload drivers and reconfigure. Reseat NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace the NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace system board. OK? OK? Done N N N N Y Y Y Y
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â1 3 I llus trated P ar ts C atal og This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdo wn and a reference for spare part numbers. 3. 1 Serial N umber Location When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the computer serial number and computer model number located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number Location
3â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Illustrated P art s Catalog 3.2 Comp uter M ajor Com ponen ts Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â3 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components Item Description Spare P ar t Number 1 Display assemb lies (include wireless antenna transceivers and cab les) 14.1-inch, WXGA 14.1-inch, WXGA 418907-001 418896-001 Ref er to Section 3.3, âDispla y Assembly Components, â fo r di s p l ay assemb ly inter nal component spare par t number inf or mation. 2 Switch co ver 418900-001 3 P ower b utton board (includes po wer b utton board cab le) 418908-001 4 Ke yboards Fo r u s e i n : Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pa n Ko r e a 418910-A41 418910-201 418910-221 418910-081 418910-051 418910-121 418910-041 418910-151 418910-211 418910-DD1 418910-021 418910-BB1 418910-061 418910-291 418910-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden/Finland Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 418910-161 418910-091 418910-131 418910-251 418910-171 418910-231 418910-BA1 418910-071 418910-101 418910-111 418910-AB1 418910-281 418910-141 418910-031 418910-001
3â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â5 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number Cable Kit 418876-001 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e Includes: P ointing stick cab le T ouchP ad cable Modem cable A udio cable Bluetooth cable 6 RTC battery 418880-001 7 Micr ophone 418903-001 8 T op co ver (includes T ouchP ad, smar t card reader , and finger print sensor board) 418882-001 Plastics Kit 418877-001 9a 9b 9c 9d 9e PC Card slot bezel Hard drive co ver Memor y cov er Mini Card cov er Bluetooth cov er 10 PC Car d/digital media board 418884-001 11 Modem module 418849-001 12 Memory modules , 1-DIMM PC2-5300 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418857-001 418856-001 418855-001 418854-001 PC2-4200 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418853-001 418852-001 418851-001 418850-001 13 Mini Car d WW AN module 418860-001
3â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â7 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 14 F an assembly 418886-001 15 System boards (include thermal grease, alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) F or use with heat sink with spare par t number 418887-001 F or use with heat sink with spare par t number 418930-001 418904-001 418931-001 16 Heat sinks (include ther mal grease , alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) F or use with discrete system board (spare par t number 418904-001) F or use with UMA system boa rd (spare par t n umber 418931-001) 418887-001 418930-001 17 Processor s (include ther mal grease, al cohol pad, and thermal pad) Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.17-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor 418874-001 418870-001 418869-001 418868-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.6 6-GHz) processor 418885-001 18 Speaker 418883-001 19 MultiBa y II eject assembly 418905-001 20 Base encl osure (includes LED boar d and LED board cab le) 418881-001 21 LED boar d (includes LED board cable) 418901-001
3â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â9 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 22 Hard drives 7200 r pm 60 GB 418861-001 5400 r pm 100 GB 80 GB 60 GB 40 GB 418863-001 418862-001 418859-001 418858-001 23 MultiBa y II drives (include bezel) D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La y er Combo Drive D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive D VD-ROM driv e 418866-001 418865-001 418864-001 24 Battery 8-cell, 5.1-AH 4-cell, 2.5-AH 418867-001 418871-001
3â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â11 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 25 Mini Car d WLAN modules 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Nor th Amer ica 407107-001 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countr ies are categor ized as the rest of the world (RO W). 407107-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan 407107-291 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407108-001 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countr ies are categor ized as the rest of the world (RO W). 407108-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Japan 407108-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countrie s are categor ized as most of the world (MO W 1). 407576-001 Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico New Zealand Pa r a g u ay Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam
3â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â13 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 25 Mini Car d WLAN modules (Continued) 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countrie s are categor ized as most of the world (MO W 2). 407576-002 Aruba A ustr ia Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countr ies are categor ized as the rest of the world (RO W). 407576-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in Japan 407576-291 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in K orea 407576-AD1
3â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â15 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 25 Mini Car d WLAN modules (Continued) 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the follo wing countries: 409250-004 Israel Jordan Ku wa i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine 26 Bluetooth® module (includes Bluetooth module cab le) 409993-001
3â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 3 .3 Di s pla y Asse mbl y Co mpone nts
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â17 T able 3-2 Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P ar t Number 1 Display bezel 418889-001 2 Display panels 14.1-inch, WXGA 14.1-inch, WXGA 418891-001 418890-001 3 Display Hinge Kit 418902-001 4 Display In ver ter 418888-001 5 Wireless Antenna Kit 418899-001 6 Display enclosure 418895-001 Not illustrated: Display Brac ket Kit (includes left display br ack et) Display Cab le Kit (for use with 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y panel) Display Cab le Kit (for use with 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y panel) Display Scre w Kit Display Rubber Kit (includes all displa y bezel rubber and mylar scre w cov ers) 418894-001 418898-001 418897-001 418892-001 418893-001
3â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 3.4 P l asti c s Kit
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â19 T able 3-3 Plastics Kit Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P ar t Number Plastics Kit Includes: 418877-001 1 PC Card slot bezel 2 Hard dr iv e cov er (includes 2 capt ive scre ws, captured b y C clips) 3 Memor y module compar tment co v e r (includes 1 captiv e screw , captured by C clip) 4 Mini Card module compar tment co ver (includes 1 captiv e screw , captured by C clip) 5 Bluetooth module cove r (includes 1 captiv e screw , captured by C clip) 6 Computer feet (4)
3â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 3.5 Ca bl e Kit Ta b l e 3 - 4 Cable Kit Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P ar t Number Cable Kit Includes: 418876-001 1 P ointing stic k cable 2 Bluetooth module cabl e 3 A udio cable 4 Modem module cable 5 T ouchP ad cable
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â21 3.6 M a s s St ora ge D e vi ce s Ta b l e 3 - 5 Mass Storage Devices Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P ar t Number 1 Hard drives (include fr ame and connector) 7200 r pm 60 GB 418861-001 5400 r pm 100 GB 80 GB 60 GB 40 GB 418863-001 418862-001 418859-001 418858-001 2 Optical drives (include bezel) D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La y er Combo Drive D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive D VD-ROM driv e 418866-001 418865-001 418864-001
3â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 3.7 Miscell an eous (Not I llustra ted) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P ar t Inf ormation Description Spare P ar t Number 90-watt non-PFC A C adapter 418873-001 90-watt PFC A C adapter 418875-001 65-watt PFC A C adapter 418872-001 External MultiBa y II 366143-001 External MultiBa y II power cable and stand 366144-001 HP Extended Life Battery 367456-001 HP Doc king Station 374803-001 HP Doc king Station Miscellaneous Plastics Kit 380089-001 Label Kit 418879-001 MultiBay 8X D VD-ROM Drive 373314-001 MultiBay 24X D V D/CD-R W Combo Drive 373315-001 Nylon carrying case 325814-001
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â2 3 P ower cor ds: F or use in the United States 350055-001 F or use in Australia 350055-011 F or use in Europe 350055-021 F or use in the United Kingdom 350055-031 F or use in Italy 350055-061 F or use in Denmar k 350055-081 F or use in Brazil 350055-201 F or use in Japan 350055-291 F or use in the P eopleâ s Republic of China 350055-AA1 F or use in Korea 350055-AD1 F or use in Israel 350055-BB1 F or use in Switzerl and 350055-BG1 F or use in F rench Canada 350055-DB1 Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P ar t Information (Continued) Description Spare P ar t Number
3â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog USB 1.1 diskette drive 359118-001 Screw Kit (includes the f ollowing scre ws; refer to Appendix A, âScrew Listing, â for more inf or mation on specifications and usage) 418878-001 â Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã17.0 scre w â Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded scre w â Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 screw â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã19.0 screw â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 screw â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 screw â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 screw Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P ar t Information (Continued) Description Spare P ar t Number
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â2 5 3.8 Sequ enti al P ar t Number Lis ting Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing Spare P ar t Number Description 325814-001 Nylon carr ying case 350055-001 P ow er cord f or use in the United States 350055-011 P ow er cord f or use in A ustralia 350055-021 P ow er cord f or use in Europe 350055-061 P ow er cord f or use in Italy 350055-031 P ow er cord f or use in the United Kingdom 350055-081 P ow er cord f or use in Denmark 350055-201 P ow er cord f or use in Brazil 350055-291 P ow er cord f or use in Japan 350055-AA1 P ow er cord f or use in the P eopleâ s Republ ic of China 350055-AD1 P ow er cord f or use in K orea 350055-BB1 P ow er cord for use in Isra el 350055-BG1 P ower cord f or use in Switzerland 350055-DB1 P ow er cord f or use in F rench Canada 359118-001 USB 1.1 diskette driv e 366143-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II 366144-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II power cab le and stand 367456-001 HP Extended Lif e Batter y 374803-001 HP Docking Station 380089-001 HP Docking Station Miscellaneous Plastics Kit
3â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 407107-001 802.11b/g HS WLAN Mi ni Card module f or use in Nor th Amer ica 407107-002 802.11b/g HS WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the RO W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407107-291 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan 407108-001 802.11b/g LJ WLAN m odule f or use in Nor th America 407108-002 802.11b/g LJ WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the RO W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407108-291 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Japan 407576-001 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the MOW1 countries listed below: Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u ay Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â2 7 407576-002 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the MO W2 countries listed below: Aruba A ustr ia Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus The Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger man y Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux e mbourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 407576-003 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the RO W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407576-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN Mini Card module f or use in Japan 409250-004 802.11b/g GL WLAN Mini Ca rd module for use in the f ollowing countries: Israel Jordan Ku wa i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine 409993-001 Bluetooth module (i ncludes Bluetooth module cable) 418849-001 Modem module 418850-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200, 256-MB memor y module Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
3â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 418851-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200, 512-MB memor y module 418852-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200 , 1024-MB memor y module 418853-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200 , 2048-MB memor y module 418854-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300, 256-MB memor y module 418855-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300, 512-MB memor y module 418856-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300 , 1024-MB memor y module 418857-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300 , 2048-MB memor y module 418858-001 5400-r pm, 40-GB hard drive 418859-001 5400-r pm, 60-GB hard drive 418860-001 Mini Card WW AN module 418861-001 7200-r pm, 60-GB hard drive 418862-001 5400-r pm, 80-GB hard drive 418863-001 5400-r pm, 100-GB hard drive 418864-001 8X D VD-ROM Drive 418865-001 24X D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive 418866-001 D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Driv e 418867-001 8-cell, 5.1-AH batter y 418868-001 Intel Core Du o T2300 (1.67-GHz) proc essor (includes thermal paste) 418869-001 Intel Core Du o T2400 (1.83-GHz) proc essor (includes thermal paste) 418870-001 Intel Core Du o T2500 (2.00-GHz) proc essor (includes thermal paste) 418871-001 4-cell, 2.5-AH batter y Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â2 9 418872-001 65-watt A C adapter 418873-001 90-watt non-PFC A C adapter 418874-001 Intel Core Du o T2600 (2.17-GHz) proc essor (includes thermal paste) 418875-001 90-watt PFC A C adapter 418876-001 Cable Kit 418877-001 Plastics Kit 418878-001 Screw Kit 418879-001 Label Kit 418880-001 R TC batter y 418881-001 Base enclosure 418882-001 T op cov er with 3 pointi ng stick b uttons and 3 T ouchP ad b uttons, f or use with ke yboards with P ointing Stick 418883-001 Speaker 418884-001 PC Card/digital media board 418885-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.67-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 418886-001 F an assembly 418887-001 Heat sink (i ncludes ther mal paste) 418887-001 Heat sink f or use with di screte system board (spare par t number 418904-001, includes t hermal grease, alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) 418888-001 Displa y Inv er t er 418889-001 Displa y bezel Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
3â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Illustrated P art s Catalog 418890-001 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y panel 418891-001 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y panel 418892-001 Displa y Screw Kit 418893-001 Displa y Rubber Kit 418894-001 Displa y Brac ket Kit 418895-001 Displa y enclosure 418896-001 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y assembly (includes wireless antenna transceiv ers and cables) 418897-001 Displa y Cable Kit f o r use with WXGA displa y panel 418898-001 Displa y Cable Kit f o r use with WXGA displa y panel 418899-001 Wireless Antenna Kit 418900-001 Switch cov er 418901-001 LED board (includes LED board cable) 418902-001 Displa y Hinge Kit 418903-001 Microphone 418904-001 System board f o r use with heat sink with spare par t number 418887-001 (includes ther ma l grease , alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) 418905-001 MultiBa y II eject assembly 418907-001 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y assembly (includes wireless antenna transceiv ers and cables) 418908-001 P ow er button board (includes po wer button board cab le) 418910-001 K eyboard f or us e in the United States 418910-021 K eyboard f or inter national use Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â31 418910-031 K eyboard f or use in the United Kingdom 418910-041 K eyboard f o r use in Ger many 418910-051 K eyboard f or use in F rance 418910-061 K eyboard f or use in Italy 418910-071 K eyboard f or use in Spain 418910-081 K eyboard f or use in Denmar k 418910-091 K eyboard f or use in Norwa y 418910-101 K eyboard f or use in Sweden/Finland 418910-111 K eyboard f or use in Switzerland 418910-121 K eyboard f or use in F rench Canada 418910-131 K eyboard f o r use in P or tugal 418910-141 K eyboard f or use in T urke y 418910-151 K eyboard f or use in Greece 418910-161 K eyboard f or use in Latin Amer ica 418910-171 K eyboard f or use in Saudi Arabia 418910-201 K eyboard f or use in Brazil 418910-211 K eyboard f or use in Hungar y 418910-221 K eyboard f or us e in the Czech Repub lic 418910-231 K eyboard f or use in Slov akia 418910-251 K eyboard f or use in Russia 418910-281 K eyboard f o r use in Thailand 418910-291 K eyboard f or use in Japan Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
3â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 418910-A41 K e yboard f o r use in Belgium 418910-AB1 K eyboard f or use in T aiw an 418910-AD1 K eyboard f or use in K orea 418910-BA1 K eyboard f o r use in Slov enia 418910-BB1 K eyboard f or use in Israel 418910-DD1 K eyboard f o r use in Iceland 418930-001 Heat sink f or use with UM A system board (spare par t n u mber 418931-001, includes ther mal grease , alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) 418931-001 System board f o r use with heat sink with spare par t number 418930-001 (includes ther ma l grease , alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 4â1 4 Remo v al an d R ep la cemen t Preliminaries This chapter provides essential information for proper and safe remov al and replacement service. 4. 1 T oo ls Required Y ou will need the follo wing tools to complete the remov al and replacement procedures: â Magnetic scre wdriv er â Phillips P0 and P1 scre wdriv ers â T orx8 screwdri ver â Flat-bladed scre wdriv er
4â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ies 4.2 Ser vice C onsidera tions The follo wing sections include some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. â As you remov e each subassembly from the computer , place the subassembly (and all accompanying scre ws) aw ay from the work area to pre vent damage. Pl a s t i c P a r t s Using excessi ve force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts. Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance instructions. C abl es and Conn ec tors à CA UTION: When se rvi c ing the compute r , be sur e that cables ar e placed in their pr oper locatio ns during the r eass embl y pr ocess . Impr oper cable placement can damage the com puter . Cables must be handled with extreme care to a void damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during remov al and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whene ver possible. In all cases, a void bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Be sure that cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged b y parts being remov ed or replaced. Handle flex cables w ith e xtreme care; these cables tear easily .
Re mov al and Replacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 4â3 4. 3 Pr e v enti ng Damage t o R emo v able D ri v es Remov able dri ves are fragile components that must be handled with care. T o pre vent damage to the computer , damage to a remov able dri ve, or loss of information, observe the follo wing precautions: â Before removing or inserting a hard dri ve, shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. â Before removing a disk ette driv e or optical driv e, be sure that a diskette or disc is not in the dri ve and be sure that the optical dri ve tray is closed. â Before handling a dri ve, be sure that you are discharged of static electricity . While handling a dri ve, a void touching the connector . â Handle dri ves on surfaces co vered with at least one inch of shock-proof foam. â A void dropping dri ves from an y height onto any surf ace. â After removing a hard dri ve, an optical dri ve, or a disk ette dri ve, place it in a static-proof bag. â A void e xposing a hard dri ve to products that ha ve magnetic f ields, such as monitors or speakers. â A void e xposing a dri ve to temperature e xtremes or liquids. â If a dri ve must be mailed, place the dri ve in a b ubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protecti ve packaging and label the package âFRA GILE: Handle W ith Care. â
4â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ies 4.4 Pr e v enting El ec tr osta tic D ama ge Many electronic components are sensiti ve to electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensiti vity . Networks b uilt into many inte grated circuits provide some protection, b ut in many cases, the dischar ge contains enough po wer to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions. A sudden dischar ge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensiti ve de vices or microcircuitry . Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, b ut damage occurs. An electronic de vice exposed to electrostatic dischar ge might not be af fected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the de vice might function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life e xpectancy .
Re mov al and Replacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 4â5 4.5 P ac k a ging an d T ranspor tin g Precautions Use the follo wing grounding precautions when packaging and transporting equipment: â T o av oid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes. â Protect all electrostatic-sensiti ve parts and assemblies with conducti ve or approv ed containers or packaging. â K eep electrostatic-sensitiv e parts in their containers until the parts arri ve at static-free workstations. â Place items on a grounded surface before remo ving items from their containers. â Alw ays be properly grounded when touching a sensiti ve component or assembly . â Store reusable electrostatic-sensiti ve parts from assemblies in protecti ve packaging or nonconducti ve foam. â Use transporters and con ve yors made of antistatic belts and roller b ushings. Be sure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to a v oid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
4â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ies 4.6 W orksta tion Precau tions Use the follo wing grounding precautions at workstations: â Cov er the workstation with approv ed static-shielding material (refer to T able 4-2, âStatic-Shielding Materialsâ ). â Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. â Use conducti ve f ield service tools, such as cutters, scre wdriv ers, and v acuums. â When f ixtures must directly contact dissipati ve surf aces, use f ixtures made only of static-safe materials. â K eep the work area free of nonconducti ve materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. â Handle electrostatic-sensiti ve components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. â A void contact with pins, leads, or circuitry . â T urn of f power and input signals before inserting or remo ving connectors or test equipment.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 4â7 4.7 Groundin g Eq uip ment an d Methods Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. â When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. T o provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap. â When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conducti ve floors or dissipati ve floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. T o be ef fecti ve, the conducti ve strips must be worn in contact with the skin. Other grounding equipment recommended for use in pre venting electrostatic damage includes: â Antistatic tape â Antistatic smocks, aprons, and slee ve protectors â Conducti ve bins and other assembly or soldering aids â Nonconducti ve foam â Conducti ve tabletop workstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance â Static-dissipati ve tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground â Field service kits â Static aw areness labels â Material-handling packages â Nonconducti ve plastic bags, tubes, or boxes â Metal tote boxes â Electrostatic v oltage le vels and protecti ve materials
4â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ies T able 4-1 sho ws ho w humidity af fects the electrostatic voltage le vels generated by dif ferent acti vities. T able 4-2 lists the shielding protection provided b y antistatic bags and floor mats. Ta b l e 4 - 1 T ypical Electro static V oltage Levels Relative Humidity Event 10% 40% 55% W alking across car pet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V W alking across vinyl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vin yl tra y 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrof oam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing b ubble pac k from PCB 26,500 V 2 0,000 V 7,000 V P acking PCBs in f oam-lined bo x 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V â A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Ta b l e 4 - 2 Static-Shielding Materials Material Use V oltage Protection Level Antistatic plastic Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic F loor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â1 5 Remo v al an d R ep la cemen t Pr ocedure s This chapter provides remo val and replacement procedures. There are as many as 81 scre ws, in 14 dif ferent sizes, that must be remov ed, replaced, or loosened when servicing the computer . Make special note of each scre w size and location during remov al and replacement. Refer to Appendix A, âScre w Listingâ for detailed information on scre w sizes, locations, and usage.
5â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 Seria l Number Report the computer serial number to HP when requesting information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number Location
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â3 5 .2 Disasse mbl y Sequenc e Chart Use the chart belo w to determine the section number to be referenced when removing computer components. Disassembl y Sequence Char t Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.3 Preparing the Computer f or Disassemb ly Batter y 0 5.4 Hard Driv e 2 loosened to remov e the hard drive co ver 1 loosened to remov e the hard drive 4 to disassemble the hard drive 5.5 Computer F eet 0 5.6 Bluetooth Module 1 loosened 5.7 External Memor y Module 1 loosened to remove the memor y module compar tment cov er 5.8 Mini Card WLAN Module 1 loosened to remov e the Mini Card module compar tment cov er 2 remov ed to remov e the Mini Card WLAN module à T o prev ent an unresponsive system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in your computer b y the governmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in your countr y . If you install a de vice and then receiv e a warning message, remov e the device to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 5.9 MultiBa y II De vice 1
5â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.10 Key b o a r d 3 5.11 RT C B a t t e r y 0 5.12 Inter nal Memor y Module 0 5.13 Modem Module 2 5.14 Mini Card WW AN Module 2 5.15 Switch Cov er 6 5.16 P ow er Button Board 2 5.17 F an Assemb ly 1 5.18 Heat Sink 6 loosened 5.19 Processor 1 loosened 5.20 Displa y Assembly Displa y bezel Displa y hinges Displa y panel Displa y inv er ter Wireless antenna transceiv ers 7 4 4 6 0 2 5.21 To p C o v e r 12 5.22 PC Card/Digital Media Board 3 5.23 Speaker 0 5.24 Microphone 0 5.25 System Board 6 5.26 MultiBa y II Eject Assembly 1 Disassembl y Sequence Char t (Continued)
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â5 5 .3 Preparing t he C omp uter for Di sassem bl y Before you begin an y remov al or installation procedures: 1. Shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is of f or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the computer . 3. Disconnect the po wer cord.
5â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 4. Remov e the battery by follo wing these steps: a. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. b . Slide the battery release latch on the right 1 and then the battery release latch on the left 2 to release the battery . c. Slide the battery 3 straight back and remov e it. R emo ving the Battery Re verse the abov e procedure to install the battery . Battery Spare P a rt Number Information 8-cell, 5.1-AH 4-cell, 2.5-AH 418867-001 418871-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â7 5 .4 Hard Driv e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. Har d Drive Spare P ar t Number Information 7200 r pm 60 GB 418861-001 5400 r pm 100 GB 80 GB 60 GB 40 GB 418863-001 418862-001 418859-001 418858-001
5â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Loosen the two Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ve cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the right side of the hard dri ve cov er 2 and swing it up and to the left. 5. Remov e the hard driv e cov er . â The hard dri ve cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 418877-001. R emo ving the Har d Dri ve C ov er
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â9 6. Loosen the Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded hard dri ve retention scre w 1 . 7. Grasp the mylar tab 2 on the hard dri ve and slide the hard dri ve 3 to the left to disconnect it from the system board. 8. Remov e the hard driv e 4 from the hard driv e bay . R emo ving the Har d Dri ve
5â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 9. Remov e the four Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 hard driv e frame scre ws 1 from each side of the hard driv e. 10. Lift the frame 2 straight up to remov e if from the hard driv e. R emo ving the Har d Dri ve F r ame Re verse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the hard dri ve.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â11 5. 5 C o m p u t e r F e e t The computer feet are adhesi ve-backed rubber pads. The feet are included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 418877-001. Re p la ci n g t h e Co m pu t er Fee t
5â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .6 Bluetoot h Module 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Loosen the Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 scre w 1 that secures the Bluetooth module cov er to the computer . 3. Remov e the Bluetooth module cove r 2 . R emo v ing the Bluetooth Module Co ve r Bluetooth Module Spare P ar t Number Information Bluetooth module (includes Blue tooth module cab le) 409993-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â13 4. Slide the Bluetooth module 1 to the right until the left side of the module is clear of the left side of the clip in the base enclosure. 5. Swing the left side of the Bluetooth module 2 out of the base enclosure. 6. Slide the Bluetooth module 3 to the left until it is remov ed from the base enclosure. 7. Disconnect the Bluetooth module cable 4 from the Bluetooth module. 8. Remov e the Bluetooth module. â The Bluetooth module cable is included with the Bluetooth module spare part kit and is also a vailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. R emo v ing the Bluetooth Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install a Bluetooth module.
5â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .7 Exter nal M emor y Module 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation PC2-5300 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418857-001 418856-001 418855-001 418854-001 PC2-4200 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418853-001 418852-001 418851-001 418850-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â15 3. Loosen the Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 scre w 1 that secures the memory module compartment cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the right edge of the cov er 2 and swing it up and to the left. 5. Remov e the memory module compartment cove r . â The memory module compartment cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 418877-001. R emo v ing the Memor y Module Co mpartment Co ver
5â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 7. Slide the module 2 aw ay from the socket at an angle. 8. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with a notch 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Memor y Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install a memory module.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â17 5 .8 M ini Card WL AN Modul e Mini Car d WLAN Module Spare P ar t Number Information 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407107-001 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the countr ies listed below . These countries are catego r ized as the rest of the w or ld (R O W). 407107-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan 407107-291 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407108-001 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or us e in the R O W countries listed below: 407108-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Japan 407108-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f o r use in the countries listed below . These countries are catego r ized as most of the w or ld 1 (MO W1). 407576-001 Antigua & Barb uda Argentina Au s t ra l i a Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam
5â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f o r use in the countries listed below . These countries are catego r ized as most of the w or ld 2 (MO W2). 407576-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux e mbourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the RO W countr ies listed below: 407576-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in Japan 407576-291 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in K orea 407576-AD1 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the f ollowing countries: 409250-004 Israel Jordan Ku w a i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine Mini Car d WLAN Module Spare P ar t Number Info rmation (Continued)
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â19 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. 3. Loosen the Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 scre w 1 that secures the Mini Card module compartment cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the front of the cov er 2 and swing it up and tow ard the back of the computer . 5. Remov e the Mini Card module compartment cove r . â The Mini Card module compartment cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 418877-001. R emo ving the Mini C ard Module C ompartment Co v er
5â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Make note of which wireless antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Card WLAN module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the auxiliary and main wireless antenna cables 1 from the Mini Card WLAN module. â The wireless antenna cables are a v ailable in the W ireless Antenna Kit, spare part number 418899-001. 7. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre ws 2 that secure the Mini Card WLAN module to the computer . (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 8. Remov e the Mini Card WLAN module 3 by pulling the module aw ay from the socket at an degree angle. â Mini Card modules are designed with a notch 4 to pre vent incorrect installation. R emo ving a Mini C ard WLAN Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card WLAN module.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â21 5. 9 M u l t i B a y I I D ev i c e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the left side to ward you. MultiBa y II Device Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive D VD-ROM drive 418866-001 418865-001 418864-001
5â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 screw 1 that secures the MultiBay II de vice to the computer . 4. Push in on the right side of the MultiBay II de vice 2 . (The MultiBay II de vice partially protrudes from the MultiBay II.) 5. Slide the MultiBay II de vice 3 out of the computer . R emo ving the MultiBa y I I De v ice Re verse the abov e procedure to install an MultiBay II device.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â2 3 5. 1 0 Ke y b o a r d 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. Ke yboard Spare P ar t Number Inf o rmation Fo r u s e i n : Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pan Ko r e a 418910-A41 418910-201 418910-221 418910-081 418910-051 418910-121 418910-041 418910-151 418910-211 418910-DD1 418910-021 418910-BB1 418910-061 418910-291 418910-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden/Finland Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 418910-161 418910-091 418910-131 418910-251 418910-171 418910-231 418910-BA1 418910-071 418910-101 418910-111 418910-AB1 418910-281 418910-141 418910-031 418910-001
5â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the three T orx8 T8M2.5Ã11.0 screws that secure the ke yboard to the computer . R emo ving the K ey board S cr e w s
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â2 5 4. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Open the computer as far as possible. 6. Slide the four release tabs 1 on the rear edge of the ke yboard forward. 7. Lift the rear edge of the ke yboard 2 and swing it up to ward you until it rests on the palm rest. Re le a s i ng t h e K eyb oa rd
5â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 8. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector 1 to which the ke yboard cable is attached and disconnect the keyboard cable 2 . 9. Release the ZIF connector 3 to which the pointing stick cable is attached and disconnect the pointing stick cable 4 . 10. Remov e the keyboard. Disconnecting the K e yboar d and P ointing S tick C ables
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â2 7 11. If it is necessary to replace the pointing stick cable, turn the ke yboard upside down with the space bar to ward you. 12. Release the ZIF connector 1 to which the pointing stick cable is attached and disconnect the pointing stick cable 2 . â The pointing stick cable is included with all ke yboard spare part kits and is also a v ailabl e in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. R emo v ing the P ointing S tic k Cable Re verse the abov e procedure to install the keyboard.
5â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 1 R TC B a t t e r y â The R TC battery is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 418877-001. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Disconnect the R TC battery cable 1 from the system board and remov e the cable from the clips 2 in the top cov er . 4. Remov e the R TC battery 3 from the clip in the base enclosure. â The R TC battery is secured to the top cov er by two-sided tape. R emo ving the R T C Batter y Re verse the abov e procedure to install an R TC battery .
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â2 9 5 . 1 2 Internal M emor y Module 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation PC2-5300 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418857-001 418856-001 418855-001 418854-001 PC2-4200 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418853-001 418852-001 418851-001 418850-001
5â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 4. Slide the module 2 aw ay from the socket at an angle. 5. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with a notch 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Memor y Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install a memory module.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â31 5 . 1 3 Modem Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). Modem Module Spare P ar t Number Information Modem module 418849-001
5â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the modem module to the system board. 4. Lift the right side of the modem module 2 to disconnect it from the system board. 5. Disconnect the modem module cable 3 from the modem module. â The modem module cable is included in the modem module spare part kit and is also a v ailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. 6. Remov e the modem module. R emo ving the Modem Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install the modem module.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â3 3 5 . 1 4 M ini Card WW AN Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). Mini Car d WW AN Module Spare P ar t Number Information Mini Card WW AN module 418860-001
5â34 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Make note of which wireless antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Card WW AN module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the auxiliary and main wireless antenna cables 1 from the Mini Card WW AN module. â The wireless antenna cables are a v ailable in the W ireless Antenna Kit, spare part number 418899-001. 4. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre ws 2 that secure the Mini Card WW AN module to the computer . (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 5. Remov e the Mini Card WW AN module 3 by pulling the module aw ay from the socket at an angle. â Mini Card modules are designed with a notch 4 to pre vent incorrect installation. R emo ving a Mini C ard WW AN Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card WW AN module.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â3 5 5. 1 5 Sw i t c h C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. 4. Remov e the two T8M2.5Ã11.0 scre ws 1 and the four Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 scre ws 2 that secure the switch cover to the computer . R emo ving the S w itch C ov er Scr e w s Switch Co ver Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation Switch cov er 418900-001
5â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. T urn the computer display-side up with front to ward you. 6. Open the computer as far as possible. 7. Disconnect the po wer button board cable 1 from the system board. 8. Insert a thin flat-bladed tool under the hinge cov er sections 2 of the switch cov er and lift up until the switch cov er 3 disengages from the computer . 9. Remov e the switch cov er . R emo ving the S w itch C ov er Re verse the abov e procedure to install the switch cov er .
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â3 7 5. 1 6 P owe r B u t t o n B o a r d 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Remov e the switch cov er ( Section 5.15 ). 4. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the po wer button board to the switch cov er . 5. Remov e the power b utton board 2 from the switch cov er . R emo v ing the P o w er Button Boar d Re verse the abov e procedure to install the power b utton board. P ower Button Boar d Spare P ar t Number Information P ow e r b utton board (includes pow e r b utton board cab le) 418908-001
5â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 7 Fa n A s s e m b l y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Remov e the switch cov er ( Section 5.15 ). 4. Disconnect the fan cable 1 from the system board. 5. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 scre w 2 that secures the fan assembly to the base enclosure. 6. Remov e the fan assembly 3 from the computer . R emo ving the F an Assembl y Re verse the abov e procedure to install the fan assembly . F an Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information F an assembly 418886-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â3 9 5 . 1 8 Hea t Sink 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) Heat Sink Spare P ar t Number Information â All heat sink spare par t kits incl ude ther mal grease , alcohol pads, and ther mal pads. F or use with discrete system board (spare par t number 418904-001) F or use with UMA system board (spare par t number 418931-001) 418887-001 418930-001
5â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 2. Loosen the four Phillips PM2.0Ã10.0 scre ws 1 and the two Phillips PM2.0Ã13.0 scre ws 2 that secure the heat sink to the system board. 3. Remov e the heat sink 3 from the base enclosure. â Due to the adhesi ve quality of the thermal paste located between the heat sink and processor , it may be necessary to mov e the heat sink from side to side to detach the heat sink from the processor . R emo ving the Heat Sink
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â41 â The thermal paste and thermal pads should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the heat sink 1 , processor 2 , Chip1 3 , and Chip2 4 each time the heat sink is remov ed. Thermal paste and thermal pads are included with all heat sink, processor , and system board spare part kits. Ther mal P ast e and Ther mal P ad L ocations Re verse the abov e procedure to install the heat sink.
5â4 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 9 P r o c e s s o r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) Pr ocessor Spare P ar t Number Information Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.17-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor 418874-001 418870-001 418869-001 418868-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.6 6-GHz) processor 418885-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â43 2. Use a flat-bladed scre wdriv er to turn the processor locking scre w 1 one-half turn counterclockwise until you hear a click. 3. Lift the processor 2 straight up and remov e it. â The gold triangle 3 on the processor should be aligned with the triangle icon 4 on the processor socket when you install the processor. R emo v ing the Pr ocess or Re verse the abov e procedure to install the processor .
5â44 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .20 Displa y Asse mbl y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Disconnect the wireless ante nna cables from the Mini Card WLAN module ( Section 5.8 ). 3. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.10) . 4. Disconnect the wireless ante nna cables from the Mini Card WW AN module ( Section 5.14 ). 5. Remov e the switch cov er ( Section 5.15) . Displa y Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information 14.1-inch, WXGA 14.1-inch, WXGA 418907-001 418896-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â4 5 6. Close the computer and turn it upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. 7. Remov e the following scre ws: 1 T wo T orx8 T8M2.5Ã11.0 scre ws from the computer bottom 2 T wo T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 scre ws from the computer rear panel 3 One Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w from the computer battery bay R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y Scr ew s
5â46 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 8. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 9. Open the computer as far as it will open. 10. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the system board. 11. Remov e the wireless antenna cables 2 and 3 from the Mini Card compartment and the top cov er clips. Disconnecting the Dis pla y Cable and R emo v ing the Wi r eles s Ante nna Cab les
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â4 7 Ã CA UTION: Support the display as sembly w hen remo ving the f ollow ing sc r ew s. F ailur e to support the displa y assembl y can result in damage t o the displa y assembl y and other computer componen ts. 12. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 screws 1 that secure the display assembly to the computer . 13. Lift the display assembly 2 straight up and remov e it. R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y
5â4 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Displa y bezel 418889-001 Displa y panels 14.1-inch, WXGA 14.1-inch, WXGA 418891-001 418890-001 Displa y Hinge Kit 418902-001 Displa y Inv er ter 418888-001 Wireless Antenna Kit 418899-001 Displa y enclosure 418895-001 Displa y Brack et Kit (includes left display br ack et) Displa y Cable Kit (f or use with 14.1-inch, WXGA display panel) Displa y Cable Kit (f or use with 14.1-inch, WXGA display panel) Displa y Screw Kit Displa y Rubber Kit (includes all displa y bezel rubber and mylar screw co vers) 418894-001 418898-001 418897-001 418892-001 418893-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â4 9 14. Remov e the following: 1 and 2 four rubber scre w covers â The two rubber scre w cov ers 1 on the top edge of the display bezel are dif ferent from the two rubber scre w cov ers 2 on the bottom edge of the display bezel. Both types of rubber scre w covers are included in the Display Rubber Kit, spare part number 418893-001. 3 Four Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Scr e w s
5â5 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 15. Flex the insides edges of the left and right sides 1 and the top and bottom sides 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages from the display enclosure. 16. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Displa y bezel 418889-001 Displa y enclosure 418895-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â51 17. If it is necessary to replace the display hinges, remov e the Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre w 1 and the Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre w 2 that secure each hinge to the display enclosure. 18. Remov e the display hinges 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Hinges Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Displa y Hinge Kit 418902-001
5â5 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 19. Remov e the four mylar screw co vers 1 and the four Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre ws 2 that secure the display panel to the display enclosure. 20. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 3 that secure the display in verter to the display enclosure. 21. Remov e the display panel 4 and display in verter 5 from the display enclosure. R emo v ing the Displa y P anel Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Displa y panels 14.1-inch, WXGA 14.1-inch, WXGA 418891-001 418890-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â5 3 22. Disconnect the display 1 and backlight cables 2 from the in ve rter . 23. Remov e the in verter 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Inv erter Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Displa y Inv er ter 418888-001
5â54 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 24. If it is necessary to replace the wireless antenna transcei vers and cables, remov e the two T orx T8M2.5Ã4.0 screws 1 that secure the left and right transcei vers to the display enclosure. 25. Remov e the wireless antenna cables 2 from the clips in the display enclosure. 26. Detach the wireless antenna transcei vers 3 from the display enclosure. 27. Remov e the wireless antenna transceiv ers and cables. R emo ving the W irele ss An tenna T rans c e i ve rs and C ables Re verse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the display assembly Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Wireless Antenna Kit 418899-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â5 5 5. 2 1 T o p C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) e. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) 2. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front tow ard you. T op Cover Spare P ar t Number Inf o rmation T op cover (includes T ouchPad , smart card reader , and finger print sensor board) 418882-001
5â5 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the following: 1 T wo rubber scre w cov ers 2 Nine T orx8 T8M2.5Ã11.0 scre ws that secure the top cov er to the base enclosure 3 One Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w that secures the top cover to the base enclosure R emo ving the T op Co ve r Sc r ew s, P ar t 1
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â5 7 4. T urn the computer right-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Disconnect the follo wing cables from the system board: 1 T ouchPad cable 2 Fingerprint reader board cable 3 Smart card assembly cable Disconnecting the T op Co ve r Cables
5â5 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Remov e the microphone 1 from the clip in the top cov er and the cable 2 from the routing clips in the top cov er . Re le a s i ng t h e Mi crop h o ne
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â5 9 7. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 screws that secure the top cov er to the base enclosure. R emo ving the T op Co ve r Sc r ew s, P ar t 2
5â60 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 8. Swing the rear edge of the top cov er 1 up and forward 2 until the left and right sides disengage from the base enclosure. 9. Remov e the top cove r 3 . R emo ving the T op Co ve r Re verse the abov e procedure to install the top cov er .
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â61 5 .2 2 P C C ard/Di gital Medi a Board 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) e. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) f. T op cov er ( Section 5.21 ) PC Car d/Digital Media Board Spare P ar t Number Information PC Card/digital media board 418884-001
5â6 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 2. Remov e the three Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 screws 1 that secure the PC Card/digital media board to the system board. 3. Lift up on the right side of the PC Card/digital media board 2 to disconnect the board from the system board. R emo ving the P C Car d/Digital Medi a Board
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â6 3 4. If it is necessary to remov e the PC Card assembly from the digital media board, disengage the hooks 1 on the PC Card assembly from the tabs on the digital media board. 5. Remov e the PC Card assembly 2 from the digital media board. R emo ving the P C Car d Asse mbly Re verse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the PC Card/digital media board.
5â64 Maintenance and Servi c e Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 23 S p e a k e r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) e. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) f. T op cov er ( Section 5.21 ) g. PC Card/digital media board ( Section 5.22 ) Speaker Spare P ar t Number Information Speak er 418883-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â65 2. Disconnect the speaker cable 1 from the system board. 3. Remov e the speaker 2 from the base enclosure. R emo ving the S peak er Re verse the abov e procedure to install the speaker .
5â6 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 24 M i c r o p h o n e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) e. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) f. T op cov er ( Section 5.21 ) g. PC Card/digital media board ( Section 5.22 ) Micr ophone Spare P ar t Number Information Microphone 418903-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â6 7 2. Disconnect the microphone cable 1 from the system board. 3. Remov e the microphone 2 from the base enclosure. R emo ving the Mi cr ophone Re verse the abov e procedure to install the microphone.
5â6 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 2 5 Sys t e m B o a rd â When replacing the system board, be sure that the follo wing components are remov ed from the defectiv e system board and installed on the replacement system board: â Memory modules ( Section 5.7 and Section 5.12 ) â Mini Card WLAN module ( Section 5.8 ) â R TC battery ( Section 5.11) â Modem module ( Section 5.13 ) â Mini Card WW AN module ( Section 5.14 ) â Processor ( Section 5.19 ) System Boar d Spare P ar t Number Information F or use with heat sink with spare par t number 418887-001 F or use with heat sink with spare par t number 418930-001 418904-001 418931-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â6 9 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Bluetooth board ( Section 5.6 ) c. MultiBay II de vice ( Section 5.9 ) d. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.15 ) f. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) g. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) h. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) i. T op co ver ( Section 5.21 ) j. PC Card/digital media board ( Section 5.22 ) k. Speaker ( Section 5.23 ) l. Microphone ( Section 5.24 )
5â7 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 2. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front tow ard you. 3. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 scre ws on each side of the hard dri ve connector that secure the system board to the base enclosure. R emo ving the S y stem Boar d Scr ew s, P art 1
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â71 4. T urn the computer right-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Remov e the audio board cables 1 from the space between the system board and the base enclosure. 6. Disconnect the audio board cable 2 from the system board. 7. Disconnect the Bluetooth module cable 3 from the system board and remov e the cable from the base enclosure. â The audio board and Bluetooth module cables are a v ailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. Disconnecting the S yst em Boar d Cables , P art 1
5â7 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 8. Disconnect the modem module cable 1 from the system board. â The modem module cable is a v ailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. 9. Release the ZIF connector 2 to which the LED board cable is attached and disconnect the LED board cable 3 from the system board. Disconnecting the S yst em Boar d Cables , P art 2
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â7 3 10. Remov e the four Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 screws that secure the system board to the base enclosure. R emo ving the S y stem Boar d Scr ew s, P art 2
5â7 4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 11. Use the hard dri ve connector 1 to lift the right side of the system board 2 until it rests at an angle. 12. Slide the system board 3 aw ay at an angle and remov e it. R emo ving the S y stem Boar d
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â7 5 13. If it is necessary to replace the audio cable, disconnect the cable from the three connectors on the system board and remov e the cable. â The audio cable is a v ailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. R emo ving the A udio C able
5â7 6 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 14. If it is necessary to replace the modem connector and cable, remov e the connector 1 from the clip in the base enclosure and remov e the cable 2 from the routing channel in the base enclosure. â The modem cable is a v ailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. R emo v ing the Modem Connec tor and Cable Re verse the abov e procedures to install the system board.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â77 5 .2 6 MultiBay II E jec t A ssemb ly 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Bluetooth board ( Section 5.6 ) c. MultiBay II de vice ( Section 5.9 ) d. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.15 ) f. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) g. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) h. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) i. T op co ver ( Section 5.21 ) j. PC Card/digital media board ( Section 5.22 ) k. Speaker ( Section 5.23 ) l. Microphone ( Section 5.24 ) m. System board ( Section 5.25 ) MultiBa y II Eject Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information MultiBa y II eject assemb ly 418905-001
5â7 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 2. Remov e the Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 screw 1 that secures the MultiBay II eject assembly to the base enclosure. 3. Remov e the MultiBay II eject assembly 2 from the base enclosure. R emo v ing the MultiBay II E ject As sembl y Re verse the abov e procedure to install the MultiBay II eject assembly .
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 6â1 6 Spec ifica tions This chapter provides physical and performance specif ications. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer Dimensions Metric U .S. Height (front to back) Width Depth 2.9 to 3.4 cm 33.1 cm 23.9 cm 1.1 to 1.3 in 13.0 in 9.4 in W eight 2.2 kg 4.9 lbs Input P ower Operating v oltage Operating current 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A â 65 W 19.0 V dc @ 4.74 A â 90 W 3.5 A or 4. 74 A T emperature Operating (not writing to optical disc) Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating 0°C to 35°C 5°C to 35°C -20°C to 60°C 32°F to 95°F 41°F to 95°F -4°F to 140°F
6â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Spe cificat ion s Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90% 5% to 95% 10% to 90% 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia) -15 m to 3,048 m -15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft -50 ft to 40,000 ft Shock Operating Nonoperating 125 g, 2 ms, half-sine 200 g, 2 ms, half-sine Random Vibration Operating Nonoperating 0.75 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.25 oct/min s weep rate 1.50 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.5 oct/min s weep rate â Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The computer operates well within this range of temperatures. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â3 Ta b l e 6 - 2 14.1-inch, WXGA Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 21.3 cm 28.5 cm 35.8 cm 8.4 in 11.2in 14.1 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 250:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r ma t Configuration 0.279 à 0.279 mm 1024 à 768 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 4.0 W Viewing angle /-40° horizontal, 120/-40° v e r tical typical
6â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 3 Har d Drives 100-GB* 80-GB* 60-GB* 40-GB* Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g Interface type SA T A SA T A SA T A SA T A T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k Ave ra g e Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks â 195,363,650 156,301,488 117,210,240 78,140,160 Disc rotational speed 5400 r pm 5400 r pm 7200 and 5400 r pm 5400 r pm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) â Certain restrictions and exclusi ons apply. Consult Customer Care for details. *1 GB = 1 billion b ytes when ref erring to hard dr iv e storage capacity . Actual accessible capacity is less . â Actual drive specificatio ns ma y diff er slightly .
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â5 Ta b l e 6 - 4 D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: DV D - R , DV D - R W, D VD-ROM (D VD-5, D VD-9, DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) , CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R, CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W D VD-R and DV D - R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
6â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Spe cificat ion s Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 175 ms < 285 ms < 230 ms < 335 ms A u dio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (16X) CD-R W (8X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) D VD-R (4X) DV D - R W ( 2 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,200 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 5,400 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 2,700 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 4 D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â7 Ta b l e 6 - 5 DV D - R O M D r i v e Applicable disc DV D - R O M ( DV D - 5 , DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 100 ms < 175 ms < 125 ms < 225 ms A u dio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vrms Cache b uffer 512 KB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 10 seconds Stop time < 3 seconds
6â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 6 System DMA Hard ware DMA System Function DMA0 Not applicable DMA1* Not applicable DMA2* Not applicable DMA3 Not applicable DMA4 Direct memor y access controller DMA5* A vailab le for PC Card DMA6 Not assigned DMA7 Not assigned *PC Card controller ca n use DMA 1, 2, or 5.
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â9 Ta b l e 6 - 7 System Interrupts Hard ware IRQ System Function IRQ0 System timer IRQ1 Standard 101-/102-K ey or Microsoft Natur al K eyboard IRQ2 Cascaded IRQ3 Intel 82801DB/DBM USB2 Enhanced Host Controllerâ24CD IRQ4 COM1 IRQ5* Cone xant A CâLink A udio Intel 82801DB/DBM SMBus Controllerâ24C3 Data F ax Modem with Smar tCP IRQ6 Diskette driv e IRQ7* P arallel por t IRQ8 System CMOS/real-time clock IRQ9* Microsoft A CPI-compliant system IRQ10* Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C2 Intel 82852/82855 GM/GME Graphic Controller Realtek R TL8139 F amily PCI fast Ethernet Controller
6â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s IRQ11 Intel USB EHCI controllerâ24CD Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C4 Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C7 Intel Pro/Wireless 2200BG TI OHCI 1394 host controller TI PCI1410 CardBus controller IRQ12 Synaptics PS/2 T o uchP ad IRQ13 Numer ic data processor IRQ14 Pri mar y IDE channel IRQ15 Secondar y IDE channel *Def ault configuration; audio possible configur ations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, or none. â PC Cards may assert IRQ3, IRQ4, IR Q5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or IRQ15. Either the infrared or the se rial port may assert IRQ3 or IRQ4. Ta b l e 6 - 7 System Interrupts (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â11 Ta b l e 6 - 8 System I/O Addresses I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 000 - 00F DMA controller no. 1 010 - 01F Unused 020 - 021 Interrupt controller no . 1 022 - 024 Opti chipset configuration registers 025 - 03F Unused 02E - 02F 87334 âSuper I/Oâ configuration f or CPU 040 - 05F Counter/timer registers 044 - 05F Unused 060 K eyboard controller 061 P or t B 062 - 063 Unused 064 K eyboard controller 065 - 06F Unused 070 - 071 NMI enab le/R TC 072 - 07F Unused 080 - 08F DMA page registers 090 - 091 Unused 092 P or t A 093 - 09F Unused 0A0 - 0A1 Interrupt controller no . 2
6â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 0A2 - 0BF Unused 0C0 - 0DF DMA controller no . 2 0E0 - 0EF Unused 0F0 - 0F1 Coprocessor busy clear/reset 0F2 - 0FF Unused 100 - 16F Unused 170 - 177 Secondar y fix ed disk controller 178 - 1EF Unused 1F0 - 1F7 Primar y fixed disk controller 1F8 - 200 Unused 201 Jo yStick (decoded in ESS1688) 202 - 21F Unused 220 - 22F Enter tainment audio 230 - 26D Unused 26E - 26 Unused 278 - 27F Unused 280 - 2AB Unused 2A0 - 2A7 Unused 2A8 - 2E7 Unused 2E8 - 2EF Reser v ed serial por t Ta b l e 6 - 8 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â13 I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 2F0 - 2F7 Unused 2F8 - 2FF Infrared por t 300 - 31F Unused 320 - 36F Unused 370 - 377 Secondar y diskette driv e controller 378 - 37F P arallel por t (LPT1/defa ult) 380 - 387 Unused 388 - 38B FM synthesizerâOPL3 38C - 3AF Unused 3B0 - 3BB V GA 3BC - 3BF Reser v ed (parallel por t/no EPP suppor t) 3C0 - 3DF V GA 3E0 - 3E1 PC Card controller in CPU 3E2 - 3E3 Unused 3E8 - 3EF Inter nal modem 3F0 - 3F7 âAâ diskette controller 3F8 - 3FF Ser ial por t (COM1/defa ult) CF8 - CFB PCI configuration inde x register (PCIDIV O-1) CFC - CFF PCI configuration data register (PCIDIV O-1) Ta b l e 6 - 8 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
6â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 9 System Memory Map Size Memory Address System Function 640 KB 00000000-0009FFFF Base memor y 128 KB 000A0000-000BFFFF Video memor y 48 KB 000C0000-000CBFFF Video BIOS 160 KB 000C8000-000E7FFF Unused 64 KB 000E8000-000FFFFF System BIOS 15 MB 00100000-00FFFFFF Extended memor y 58 MB 01000000-047FFFFF Super extended memory 58 MB 04800000-07FFFFFF Unused 2 MB 08000000-080FFFFF Video memor y (direct access) 4 GB 08200000-FFFEFFFF Unused 64 KB FFFF0000-FFFFFFFF System BIOS
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ1 A Sc r e w L ist ing This appendix provides specif ication and reference information for the scre ws used in the computer . All scre ws listed in this appendix are a v ailable in the Scre w Kit, spare part number 418878-001, and the Display Scre w Kit, spare part number 418892-001. Phillips P M 3 . 0Ã3. 0 Sc r ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 4 3.0 mm 3.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the hard driv e fram e to the hard dr iv e (documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Aâ2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing Phillips P M2 . 0Ã5. 0 Sc re w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 2 Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 5 5.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo screws that secure the hard driv e cov er to the computer (screws are captured on the cov er by C-clips; documented in Section 5.4 ) 2 One scre w that secures the Bluetooth module cov er to the computer (screw is captured on the cov er by a C-clip; documented in Section 5.6 ) 3 One scre w that secures the memor y module compar tment cov er to the computer (screw is captured on th e co ver b y a C-clip; documented in Section 5.7 ) 4 One scre w that secures the Mini Ca rd module compar tment co ver to the computer (screw is captured on th e co ver b y a C-clip; documented in Section 5.8 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ3 Phillips P M2 . 5Ã13 .0 S cr ew L ocation Ta b l e A - 3 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Spring-Loaded Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 1 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the hard driv e to the computer (screw is captured on the cov er by a C-clip; documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Aâ4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing Phillips P M2 . 5Ã5 . 0 Sc r e w L ocation Ta b l e A - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the MultiBa y II de vice to the computer (documented in Section 5.9 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ5 Phillips P M2 . 5Ã5 . 0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 One scre w that secures the displa y a ssembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) 2 One scre w that secures the top co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Aâ6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing Phillips P M2 . 5Ã5 . 0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 3 screws that secure the PC Card/dig ital media board to the computer (documented in Section 5.22 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ7 Phillips P M2 . 5Ã5 . 0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the system boar d to the computer (documented in Section 5.25 ) mm
Aâ8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã11.0 S cr e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 5 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã11.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 16 11.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 Three screws that secure the k eyboa rd to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) 2 T wo screws that secure the s witch co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) 3 T wo screws that secure the displa y as sembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ9 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã11.0 S cr e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 5 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã11.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 16 11.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 9 screws that secure the top co ve r to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Aâ10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã6. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 6 Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 5 6.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the modem modu le to the computer (documented in Section 5.13 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ11 Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã6. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 6 Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 5 6.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the system boar d to the computer (documented in Section 5.25 ) mm
Aâ12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã6 . 0 Sc r e w Locati on Ta b l e A - 6 Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 5 6.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the MultiBa y II eject assembly to the base enclosure (documented in Section 5.26 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ13 Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã3. 0 Sc r e w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 7 Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 3.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Mini Card WLAN to the computer (documented in Section 5.8 ) mm
Aâ14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã3. 0 Sc r e w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 7 Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 3.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Mini Card WW AN to the computer (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ15 Phillips P M 2 . 5Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the po wer button board to the s witch cov er (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
Aâ16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing Phillips P M 2 . 5Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y hinges to the displa y assembly (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ17 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 9 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the wireless antenn a tr ansceive rs to the displa y assembly (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Aâ18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing T able A-10 Phillips PM2.5Ã10.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 10.0 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm Where used: 1 F our screws that secure the heat sink to the computer (scre w s are secured to the heat sink by C- clips; documented in Section 5.18 ) T able A-11 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm Where used: 2 T wo screws that secure the heat sink to the comp uter (scre ws are secured to the heat sink by C- clips; documented in Section 5.18 ) mm mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ19 Phillips P M 2 . 5Ã10. 0 and Phillips P M2 . 5Ã13. 0 Sc re w Locati ons
Aâ20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã2 . 0 Sc r e w Locati ons T able A-12 Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 4 2.0 mm 2.0 mm 6.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the s witch co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ21 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locati on T able A-13 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the f an assembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.17 ) mm
Aâ2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locati ons T able A-13 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ2 3 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locati ons T able A-13 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Aâ2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locati on T able A-13 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the top co ve r to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ2 5 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locati ons T able A-13 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the top co ve r to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Aâ2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing Phillips P M2 . 5Ã6 . 0 Scr ew L ocations T able A-14 Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 8 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the displa y bezel to the displa y assembly (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ2 7 Phillips P M2 . 5Ã6 . 0 Scr ew L ocations T able A-14 Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 8 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y hinges to the displa y assembly (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Aâ2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing Phillips P M2 . 5Ã6 . 0 Scr ew L ocations T able A-14 Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 8 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y panel to the displa y assembly (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ1 B Ba ck u p a nd R e c o v e ry Back up HP Backup and Recov ery Manager provides se veral ways to back up the system and to recov er optimal system functionality . â HP installed dri vers, utilities, a nd applications can be copied to a CD or to a D VD using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â The computer must be connected to external po wer before you perform backup and recov ery procedures. Safeguarding Y our D ata T o safeguard your documents, store personal f iles in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of the folder . B ac kin g Up t he S y s tem Using HP Backup and Restore Manager , you can â Back up specif ic files and folders. â Back up the entire system.
Bâ2 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de Back up and R ecov er y â Back up modif ications since your last backup, using HP system restore points. â Schedule backups. Ba c king Up S pec ific Files or F ol ders Y ou can back up specific f iles or folders to the hard dri ve, to an optional external hard dri ve, or to discs. â This process will take se veral minutes, depending on the f ile size and the speed of the computer . T o back up specific f iles or folders: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up individual f iles and f olders , and then click Next . The Backup W izard opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Backup selected f iles from most common locations (Recommended) . â or â Click Advanced Backup (Experienced users) to access adv anced filtering techniques. 7. Click Next. 8. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Back up and R eco very Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ3 B ac kin g Up t he En tire Hard Driv e When you perform a complete backup of the hard dri ve, you are sa ving the full factory image, including the W indo ws operating system, software applications, and all personal f iles and folders. â A copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve, on a network dri ve, or on reco very discs that you create. â This process may take o ver an hour , depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. T o back up your entire hard dri ve: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up entire hard dri ve , and then click Next . The âBack up entire hard diskâ page opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Select the location for the backup f iles, and then click Next . 7. Select the Protect data access with passw ord check box, and type your password in the Passw ord and Conf irm boxes. â This step is optional. If you do not want to password-protect your data access, clear the Protect data access with passw ord check box. 8. Click Next. 9. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ4 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de Back up and R ecov er y Ba c king U p Modifications M ad e to th e Sys t e m When you back up modif ications since your last backup, you are creating system recov ery points. This allows you to sa ve a snapshot of your hard dri ve at a specif ic point in time. Y ou can then recov er back to that point if you want to re verse subsequent changes made to your system. â The f irst system recov ery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the f irst time you perform a backup. Subsequent recov ery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recov ery points â Before you add or extensi vely modify softw are or hardware. â Periodically , whene ver the system is performing optimally . â Recov ering to an earlier recov ery point does not af fect data f iles or e-mails created since that recov ery point. After you create a recov ery point, you are prompted to schedule subsequent recov ery points. Y ou can schedule recovery points for a specif ic time or e vent in your system. T o create and schedule a system recov ery point: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Create or manage Reco very Points , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Point Managerâ page opens. 5. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Back up and R eco very Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ5 Sc heduling Ba c k ups T o schedule backups: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup Scheduler . The âBackup Schedulerâ page opens. 2. Click Next. 3. Schedule system recov ery points at specific interv als (now , daily , weekly , or monthly) or at specif ic e vents, such as at system start or when you dock to an optional docking station (select computer models only), by clicking one of the a v ailable options. Click Next to further def ine the settings. A summary of your system recov ery point settings is displayed. 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Rec o ver y HP Backup and Recov ery Manager analyzes the hard driv e and creates a dedicated hard dri ve rec ov ery partition on the hard driv e large enough to store a cop y of the full factory image. Y ou can choose whether you want to store that cop y on the recov ery partition, on another dri ve, or on external reco very discs. â Before using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager , try repairing the system by running Microsoft W indows System Restore. For more information, select Start > Help and Support , and then search for âSystem Restore. â HP Backup and Recov ery Manager allows you to â Cr eate reco very discs (highly r ecommended). The recov ery discs are used to start up your computer and to recov er the full factory image (operating system and software) in case of system f ailure or instability .
Bâ6 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de Back up and R ecov er y â If you do not ha ve a CD or D VD burner , a copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve or on a network dri ve. â P erf orm a recov ery . Y ou can perform a full system recov e ry or recov er important files from the reco very partition on the hard dri ve, from another dri ve, or from recov ery discs that you create. Creating Reco v er y Disc s (Hi ghly R ecommen ded) After setting up the computer for the f irst time, you can create a set of recov ery discs of the full factory image, using Recov ery Media Creator in the HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . The recov ery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recov er the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system failure or instability . à CA UTION: After y ou cr eate the reco ve ry disc s, y ou can incr ease the amount of a vailable space o n the hard dr iv e by de leting the r ecov ery partition . How ev er , doing this is no t r ecommended. If y ou delete this partition , y ou will lo se an y infor mation that is on the partition . â Only one set of recov ery discs can be created for this computer . Before creating recov ery discs: â Obtain high-quality CD-R, D VD-R, or D VD R media, purchased separately . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager .
Back up and R eco very Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ7 â Number each disc before inserting it into the optical dri ve of the computer . â If necessary , you can cancel Recov ery Media Creator before you ha ve f inished creating the recov ery discs. The next time you open Recov ery Media Creator , you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process where you left of f. T o create a set of recov ery discs: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory softwar e reco very CDs or D VDs to r ecover the system (Highly r ecommended) , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Media Creatorâ page opens. 4. Click Next. 5. Click Write to CD/D VD , and then click Next . 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Pe r f o r m i n g a R e c o v e r y P er forming a Reco v er y from t he Reco v er y Dis cs T o perform a recov ery from the recovery discs: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Insert the f irst recov ery disc into the optical driv e and restart the computer . 3. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ8 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de Back up and R ecov er y P er forming a Reco v er y from t he H ard Driv e There are 2 ways to initiate a reco very from the hard dri ve: â From within W indo ws. â From the recov ery partition. Initia ting a Reco ve r y in Windo w s T o initiate a recov ery in W i ndo ws: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recov er important f iles or the entir e system , and then click Next . 5. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . â If you choose to recov er the system, the computer restarts and recov ery begins. 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Initia ting a Reco v er y from the H ard Driv e Reco v er y P ar tition T o initiate a recov ery from the hard driv e recovery partition: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Restart the computer , and then press f11 before the W indo ws operating system loads. 3. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ1 C Dis pl a y C om ponen t Rec y c lin g à W ARNI NG: The bac klight contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e xe r cis ed whe n r emo v i ng and handling the bac klight t o av oid damaging this component and ca using e xposure to the me r c ury . à CA UTION: The pr ocedur es in this appendi x can re sult in damage to displa y components . The only compo nents intended f or rec yc ling purpo ses ar e the liqui d cry stal displa y (L CD) panel and the bac klight . Car eful handling should be e xer ci sed when r emo ving these components . â Materials Disposal This HP product contains mercury in the backlight in the display assembly that might require special handling at end-of-life. Disposal of mercury may be regulated because of en vironmental considerations. For disposal or rec ycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www .eiae.org .
Câ2 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling This appendix provides disassembl y instructions for the display assembly . The display assembly must be disassembled to gain access to the backlight 1 and the liquid crystal display (LCD) panel 2. â Disassembly procedures dif fer from one display assembly to another . The procedures provided in this appendix are general disassembly instructions. Specif ic details, such as scre w sizes, quantities, and locations, and co mponent shapes and sizes, can v ary from one computer model to another .
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ3 Perform the follo wing steps to disassemble the display assembly: 1. Remov e all screw co vers 1 and scre ws 2 that secure the display bezel to the display assembly . R emo v i ng the Displa y Bez el Scr ew C ov ers and Sc re ws
Câ4 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling 2. Lift up and out on the left and right inside edges 1 and the top and bottom inside edges 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages fro m the display assembly . 3. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v i ng the Displa y Bez el
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ5 4. Disconnect all display panel cables 1 from the display in verter and remo ve the in v erter 2 . R emo v ing the Displa y Inv erter
Câ6 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling 5. Remov e all screws 1 that secure the display panel assembly to the display enclosure. 6. Remov e the display panel assembly 2 from the display enclosure. R emo v i ng the Displa y P anel Ass embl y
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ7 7. T urn the display panel assembly upside do wn. 8. Remov e all screws that secure the display panel frame to the display panel. R emo v ing the Displa y P anel F r ame Sc r e ws
Câ8 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling 9. Use a sharp-edged tool to cut the tape 1 that secures the sides of the display panel to the display panel frame. 10. Remov e the display panel frame 2 from the display panel. R emo v i ng the Displa y F r ame
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ9 11. Remov e the screws 1 that secure the backlight co ver to the display panel. 12. Lift the top edge of the backlight cov er 2 and swing it forward. 13. Remov e the backlight cove r . R emo v i ng the Bac klight C ov er
Câ10 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling 14. T urn the display panel right-side up. 15. Remov e the backlight cables 1 from the clip 2 in the display panel. R eleasing the Bac klight Cable s
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ11 16. T urn the display panel upside do wn. 17. Remov e the backlight frame from the display panel. R emo v i ng the Bac klight F r ame
Câ12 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling à W ARNI NG: The bac klight contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e xe r cis ed whe n r emo v i ng and handling the bac klight t o av oid damaging this component and ca using e xposure to the me r c ury . 18. Slide the backlight out of the backlight frame. R emo v i ng the Bac klight
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ13 19. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the LCD panel. 20. Remov e the screws 2 that secure the LCD panel to the display rear panel. 21. Release the LCD panel 3 from the display rear panel. 22. Release the tape 4 that secures the LCD panel to the display rear panel. R eleasing the L CD P anel
Câ14 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling 23. Remov e the LCD panel. R emo v ing the L CD P anel 24. Recycle the LCD panel and backlight.
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ1 D Co nnec tor P in A ssi gnm ents Ta b l e D - 1 A udio-Out (Headphone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio out, left channel 3 Ground 2 A udio out, r ight channel
Dâ2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 2 A udio-In (Microphone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio signal in 3 Ground 2 A udio signal in Ta b l e D - 3 Universal Serial Bus Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 5 VDC 3 Data 2 Data â 4 Ground
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ3 Ta b l e D - 4 S-Video-Out Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 S-VHS color (C) signal 5 TV -CD 2 Composite video signal 6 S-VHS intensity ground 3 S-VHS intensity (Y) signal 7 Composite video ground 4 S-VHS color ground
Dâ4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 5 External Monitor Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Red analog 9 5 VDC 2 Green analog 10 Ground 3 Blue analog 11 Monitor detect 4 Not connected 12 DDC 2B data 5 Ground 13 Horizontal sync 6 Ground analog 14 V er tical sync 7 Ground analog 15 DDC 2B cloc k 8 Ground analog
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ5 Ta b l e D - 6 RJ-11 (Modem) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Unused 4 Unused 2T i p 5U n u s e d 3 Ring 6 Unused
Dâ6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 7 RJ-45 (Netw ork) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 T ransmit 5 Unused 2 T ransmit â 6 Receiv e â 3 Receiv e 7 Unused 4 Unused 8 Unused
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Eâ1 E P o w er Cord S et Requirements 3-Con duc tor P o w er C ord Set The wide range input feature of the computer permits it to operate from any line v oltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts A C. The po wer cord set included with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment is purchased. Po wer cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where the computer is used.
Eâ2 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de P ow er Cord Set R equirements Gen eral R equiremen ts The requirements listed belo w are applicable to all countries. â The length of the po wer cord set must be at least 1.5 m (5.0 ft) and a maximum of 2.0 m (6.5 ft). â All po wer cord sets must be approved b y an acceptable accredited agency responsible for e v aluation in the country where the po wer cord set will be used. â The po wer cord sets must hav e a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal v oltage rating of 125 or 250 V A C, as required by each countryâ s power system. â The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conf iguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the ap pliance inlet on the back of the computer .
P ow er Cor d Set Requir ement s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Eâ3 Coun tr y-Spec ifi c Requirements 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number A ustralia EANSW 1 Au s t r i a OV E 1 Belgium C EBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark DEMK O 1 Finland FIMK O 1 F rance UTE 1 Ger many VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Jap a n ME T I 3 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord must be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wa ll plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord must be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug m ust be a two-pole g rounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and w all plug must bear a âTâ mark and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentori Law . The fle xible cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration.
Eâ4 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de P ow er Cord Set R equirements Ko r e a E K 4 The Netherlands KEMA 1 Norwa y NEMK O 1 P eopleâ s Republic of China CCC 5 Sweden SEMK O 1 Switzerland SEV 1 T aiwan BSMI 4 United Kingdom BSI 1 United States UL 2 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord must be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wa ll plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord must be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug m ust be a two-pole g rounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and w all plug must bear a âTâ mark and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentori Law . The fle xible cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 4. The fle xible cord must be T ype R VV , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size. P ow er cord set fittings (appliance co upler and wall plug) m ust bear the cer tification mar k of the agency resp onsible f or e valuation in the countr y where it will be used. 5. The fle xible cord must be T ype VC TF , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ow er cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug) m ust bear the cer tification mar k of the agency respon sible f or e valuation in the countr y where it will be used. 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements (Continued) Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ1 In de x A AC adapter, spare part numbers 3â22 , 3â29 accessory battery connector 1â22 arrow keys 1â15 audio cable illustrated 3â20 removal 5â71 audio troubleshooting 2â21 audio-in jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 audio-out jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ1 B base enclosure, spare part number 3â7, 3â29 battery removal 5â6 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â28 , 5â6 battery bay 1â13, 1â22 battery light 1â7 battery release latch 1â22 Bluetooth module removal 5â12 spare part number 3â15, 3â27 , 5â12 Bluetooth module cable illustrated 3â20 removal 5â71 Bluetooth module cover illustrated 3â19 removal 5â12 bottom components 1â22 C Cable Kit contents 3â20 spare part number 3â5 , 3â20 , 3â29 cables, service considerations 4â2 caps lock key 1â15 caps lock light 1â19 carrying case, spare part number 3â22, 3â25 CMOS clearing 1â4 components bottom 1â22 front 1â6 keyboard 1â12, 1â14
Inde xâ2 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde x left-side 1â10 rear 1â10 right-side 1â8 top 1â16, 1â18, 1â20 computer feet illustrated 3â19 locations 5â11 Computer Setup Advanced Menu 2â5 Diagnostics Menu 2â4 File Menu 2â2 overview 2â1 Security Menu 2â3 computer specifications 6â1 connector pin assignments audio-in Dâ2 audio-out Dâ1 external monitor Dâ4 headphone Dâ1 microphone Dâ2 modem Dâ5 monitor Dâ4 network Dâ6 RJ-11 Dâ5 RJ-45 Dâ6 S-Video-out Dâ3 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Dâ2 connectors, service considerations 4â2 D design overview 1â24 Digital Media Slot 1â7 disassembly sequence chart 5â3 diskette drive OS loading problems 2â19 precautions 4â3 spare part number 3â25 display assembly removal 5â44 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â30 , 5â44 display bezel illustrated 3â16 removal 5â50 spare part number 3â17, 3â29 , 5â48 , 5â50 Display Bracket Kit, spare part number 3â17, 3â30, 5â48 Display Cable Kit, spare part number 3â17, 3â30, 5â48 display component recycling Câ1 display enclosure illustrated 3â16 spare part number 3â17, 3â30 , 5â48 , 5â50 display hinge illustrated 3â16 removal 5â51 Display Hinge Kit, spare part number 3â17, 3â30, 5â48, 5â51 display inverter illustrated 3â16 removal 5â53 spare part number 3â17, 3â29 , 5â48 , 5â53
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ3 display panel illustrated 3â16 removal 5â52 spare part numbers 3â17, 3â30 , 5â48 , 5â52 display release button 1â7 Display Rubber Kit, spare part number 3â30 Display Screw Kit, spare part number 3â17, 3â30, 5â48 docking connector 1â22 drive light 1â7 drives, preventing damage 4â3 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive spare part number 3â28 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â21 spare part number 3â9, 3â21 , 3â28 , 5â21 specifications 6â5, 6â7 DVD-ROM drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â21 spare part number 3â9, 3â21 , 3â22 , 3â28 , 5â21 specifications 6â7 E electrostatic discharge 4â4, 4â8 exhaust vents 1â11 expansion product spare part number 3â22 troubleshooting 2â14 external monitor port location 1â13 pin assignments Dâ4 External MultiBay II power cable and stand, spare part number 3â22, 3â25 External MultiBay II, spare part number 3â22, 3â25 F f1 to f12 keys 1â15 fan assembly removal 5â38 spare part number 3â7 , 3â29 , 5â38 features 1â2 feet illustrated 3â19 locations 5â11 fingerprint reader 1â19 flowcharts, troubleshooting no audio 2â21, 2â22 no network/modem connection 2â26 no OS loading 2â15 no OS loading from diskette drive 2â19 no OS loading from hard drive 2â16, 2â17, 2â18 no OS loading from optical drive 2â20 no power 2â8, 2â10, 2â11 no video 2â12, 2â13 nonfunctioning device 2â23
Inde xâ4 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde x nonfunctioning docking device 2â14 nonfunctioning keyboard 2â24 nonfunctioning pointing device 2â25 fn key 1â15 front components 1â6 G grounding equipment and methods 4â7 H hard drive OS loading problems 2â16 precautions 4â3 removal 5â7 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â21 , 3â28 , 5â7 specifications 6â4 hard drive bay 1â23 hard drive cover illustrated 3â19 removal 5â8 headphone jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ1 heat sink removal 5â39 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â29 , 3â32 , 5â39 HP Docking Station, spare part number 3â22, 3â25 HP Extended Life Battery, spare part number 3â22, 3â25 I I/O address specifications 6â11 Info Center button 1â17 infrared port 1â7 interrupt specifications 6â9 K keyboard removal 5â23 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â30 , 3â31 , 3â32 , 5â23 troubleshooting 2â24 keyboard components 1â12, 1â14 keypad 1â15 L Label Kit, spare part number 3â22 , 3â29 LED board, spare part number 3â7 , 3â30 left-side components 1â10 M mass storage devices, spare part numbers 3â21 memory map specifications 6â14 memory module removal 5â14, 5â29 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â27 , 3â28 , 5â14 , 5â29 memory module compartment 1â23
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ5 memory module compartment cover illustrated 3â19 removal 5â15 microphone removal 5â66, 5â67 spare part number 3â5, 3â30 , 5â66 microphone jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 Mini Card compartment 1â23 Mini Card module compartment cover illustrated 3â19 removal 5â19 Mini Card WLAN module removal 5â17 spare part numbers 3â11, 3â13 , 3â15 , 3â26 , 3â27 , 5â17 Mini Card WWAN module removal 5â33 spare part number 3â5, 3â28 , 5â33 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit (for use with docking device), spare part number 3â22, 3â25 modem jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ5 modem module spare part number 3â5, 3â27 , 5â31 troubleshooting 2â26 modem module cable illustrated 3â20 removal 5â72 monitor port location 1â13 pin assignments Dâ4 MultiBay II device 1â9 removal 5â21 spare part numbers 5â21 MultiBay II eject assembly removal 5â77 spare part number 3â7 , 3â30 , 5â77 N network jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ6 network, troubleshooting 2â26 nonfunctioning device, troubleshooting 2â14, 2â23 num lock key 1â15 num lock light 1â19 O optical drive OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â21 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â21 , 3â22 , 5â21 specifications 6â5, 6â7 P packing precautions 4â5 password clearing 1â4
Inde xâ6 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde x PC Card slot bezel, illustrated 3â19 PC Card slots 1â11 PC Card/digital media board removal 5â61 spare part number 3â5, 3â29 , 5â61 plastic parts 4â2 Plastics Kit contents 3â19 spare part number 3â5, 3â19 , 3â29 pointing device, troubleshooting 2â25 pointing stick 1â21 pointing stick buttons 1â21 pointing stick cable, illustrated 3â20 power button 1â17 power button board removal 5â37 spare part number 3â3, 3â30 , 5â37 power connector 1â13 power cord set requirements Eâ2 spare part numbers 3â23, 3â25 power light 1â6 , 1â19 power management features 1â5 power, troubleshooting 2â8 presentation button 1â17 processor removal 5â42 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â28 , 3â29 , 5â42 R rear components 1â10 removal/replacement preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 right-side components 1â8 RJ-11 jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ5 RJ-45 jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ6 RTC battery removal 5â28 spare part number 3â5 , 3â29 S Screw Kit contents Aâ1 spare part number 3â24, 3â29 , Aâ1 screw listing Aâ1 security cable slot 1â13 serial number 1â23, 3â1, 5â2 service considerations 4â2 smart card slot 1â9 speaker location 1â7 removal 5â64 spare part number 3â7 , 3â29 , 5â64
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ7 specifications computer 6â1 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive 6â5, 6â7 DVD-ROM drive 6â7 hard drive 6â4 I/O addresses 6â11 interrupts 6â9 memory map 6â14 optical drive 6â5, 6â7 system DMA 6â8 static shielding materials 4â8 stringent security 1â4 S-Video-out jack location 1â13 pin assignments Dâ3 switch cover removal 5â35 spare part number 3â3, 3â30 , 5â35 system board removal 5â68 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â30 , 3â32 , 5â68 system DMA 6â8 system memory map 6â14 T thermal pads, replacing 5â41 thermal paste, replacing 5â41 tools required 4â1 top components 1â16, 1â18, 1â20 top cover removal 5â55 spare part number 3â5 , 3â29 , 5â55 TouchPad 1â21 TouchPad cable, illustrated 3â20 TouchPad left/right buttons 1â21 TouchPad scroll zone 1â21 transporting precautions 4â5 troubleshooting audio 2â21 Computer Setup 2â1 expansion product 2â14 flowcharts 2â6 keyboard 2â24 modem 2â26 network 2â26 nonfunctioning device 2â14 , 2â23 OS loading 2â15 overview 2â1 pointing device 2â25 power 2â8 video 2â12 U Universal Serial Bus (USB) diskette drive, spare part number 3â24 Universal Serial Bus (USB) port location 1â9, 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 unknown password 1â4
Inde xâ8 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde x V vents 1â23 video troubleshooting 2â12 volume buttons 1â17 W Windows applications key 1â15 Windows logo key 1â15 wireless antenna illustrated 3â16 removal 5â54 Wireless Antenna Kit, spare part number 3â17, 3â30, 5â48 , 5â54 wireless button 1â17 wireless light 1â6, 1â17, 1â19 workstation precautions 4â6
© Copyright 2006 He wlett-Packard De velopment Compan y , L.P . Microsoft and W indows are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Core are tradem arks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used b y He wlett-Packard Compan y under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . Ja v a is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide HP Co mpaq nc6400 Not ebook PC F irst E d iti on: May 2006 Document P ar t Number: 406 84 7 -001
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide iii Cont ent s 1 Product Description 1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2 1.2 Resetting the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â4 1.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5 1.4 External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â6 1.5 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â24 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Selecting from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Selecting from the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Selecting from the Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Selecting from the System Configuration Menu. . . . 2â5 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6
i v Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Con ten ts 3 Illustrated Parts Catalog 3.1 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 3.2 Computer Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 3.3 Display Assembly Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â16 3.4 Plastics Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â18 3.5 Cable Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â20 3.6 Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â21 3.7 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â22 3.8 Sequential Part Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â25 4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries 4.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 4.2 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Plastic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 4.3 Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . . 4â3 4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.5 Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . 4â5 4.6 Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6 4.7 Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â7
Cont ent s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de v 5 Removal and Replacement Procedures 5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2 5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . 5â5 5.4 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â7 5.5 Computer Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â11 5.6 Bluetooth Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â12 5.7 External Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â14 5.8 Mini Card WLAN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â17 5.9 MultiBay II Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â21 5.10 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â23 5.11 RTC Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â28 5.12 Internal Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â29 5.13 Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â31 5.14 Mini Card WWAN Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â33 5.15 Switch Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â35 5.16 Power Button Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â37 5.17 Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â38 5.18 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â39 5.19 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â42 5.20 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â44 5.21 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â55 5.22 PC Card/Digital Media Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â61 5.23 Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â64 5.24 Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â66 5.25 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â68 5.26 MultiBay II Eject Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â77
v i Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Con ten ts 6 Specifications A Screw Listing B Backup and Recovery C Display Component Recycling D Connector Pin Assignments E Power Cord Set Requirements Index
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â1 1 Pr oduc t D esc ription The HP Compaq nc6400 Notebook PC of fers advanced modularity , Intel® Core⢠Duo and Core Solo processors, and extensi ve multimedia support. HP Compaq nc6 400 Notebook P C
1â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Pr oduct Desc ription 1.1 F e a t u r e s â The follo wing processors, varying b y computer model: â Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.17-GHz) processor â Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor â Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor â Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor â Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.66-GHz) processor â 14.1-inch, WXGA , TFT (1440 à 900) and 14.1-inch, WXGA, TFT (1440 à 900) display , with o ver 16.8 million colors, v arying by computer model â 100-, 80-, 60-, and 40-GB high-capacity hard dri ve, v arying by computer model â 256-MB DDR2 synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) at 533 MHz and 667 MHz, expandable to 4.0 GB â Microsoft® W indo ws® XP Professional â Full-size W indo ws keyboard with numeric k eypad â T ouchPad and pointing stick pointing de vices, including a dedicated vertical scroll re gion â Integrated 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX Ethernet local area network (LAN) netw ork interface card (NIC) with RJ-45 jack â Integrated high-speed 56K modem with RJ-11 jack â Integrated wireless support for Mini Card IEEE 802.11a/b/g or 802.11b/g W ireless LAN (WLAN) de vice â Support for one T ype I or T ype II PC Card slot, with support for both 32-bit (CardBus) and 16-bit PC Cards, v arying by computer model
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â3 â External 90- and 65-watt A C adapters with 3-wire power cord, v arying by computer model â 8-cell and 4-cell Li-Ion batteries â Stereo speakers â V olume up, v olume mute, and v olume do wn b uttons â Support for the follo wing optical driv es: â D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-Layer Combo Dri ve â D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Dri ve â D VD-R OM dri ve â Connectors: â Accessory battery â Audio-in (microphone) â Audio-out (headphone) â Digital Media Slot â Docking connector â External monitor â IEEE 1394 â RJ-11 (modem) â RJ-45 (network) â S-V ideo-out â SmartPo w er â Three Uni versal Serial Bus (USB) v . 2.0
1â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Pr oduct Desc ription 1 .2 R eset tin g t he Com pu ter If the computer you are servicing has an unkno wn password, follo w the steps below to reset the passw ord. These steps also clear CMOS. â The follo wing steps will not clear an unknown passw ord if the stringent security option has been enabled in the BIOS. If stringent security is enabled, the system board must be replaced to reset an unkno wn password. Refer to Section 5.21, âT op Cov er , â for more information on replacing the system board. Before replacing the system board, perform the steps belo w to make sure stringent security has been properly enabled. Enabling stringent security provides enhanced pr otection for the po wer-on password and administrator passw ord and other forms of po wer-on authorization. Stringent security is enabled/disabled by accessing the P assword Options menu in the Computer Setup utility . Refer to Section 2.1, âComputer Setup, â for more information. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3, âPreparing the Computer for Disassembly , â for more information). 2. Remov e the real-time clock (R TC) battery (refer to Section 5.11, âR TC Battery , â for more information on removing and replacing the R TC battery). 3. W ait approximately 5 minutes. 4. Replace the R TC battery and reassemble the computer . 5. Connect A C po wer to the computer . Do not reinsert any batteries at this time. 6. T urn on the computer . All passwords and all CMOS settings ha ve been cleared.
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â5 1. 3 P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t The computer comes with po wer management features that extend battery operating time and conserv e power . The computer supports the follo wing power management features: â Standby â Hibernation â Setting customization by the user â Hotke ys for setting the le vel of performance â Battery calibration â Lid switch standby/resume â Po wer button â Adv anced Configuration and Po wer Management (A CPM) compliance
1â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Pr oduct Desc ription 1 .4 Ex ternal C ompon ents The external components on the front of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-1. F ront C omponents Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components Item Component Function 1 Wireless light On: An integrat ed wireless de vice, such as a wireless local area network (LAN) device and/or a Bluetooth® de vice, is tur ned on. 2P o w e r l i g h t â On: The computer is on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby . â Blinking rapidly: An HP Smar t A C Adapter with a higher pow er rating should be connected. â Off: The computer is o ff or in hiber nation.
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â7 3 Batter y light â Amber : A batter y is charging. â Green: A batter y is close to full charge capacity . â Blinking amber : A batter y that is the only av ailable po wer source has reached a low-battery condition. When the batter y reaches a critical lo w-batter y condition, the batter y light begins blinking more quickly . â Off: If the computer is connected to an e xter nal power source , the light is tur ned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not connected to an e xter nal power source , the light is tur ned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. 4D r i v e l i g h t â Blinking green: The hard driv e or optical drive is being accessed. â Amber : HP Mobile Data Protection has temporarily par k ed the hard drive. 5 Infrared por t Provides wireless comm unication between the computer and an optional IrD A-compliant device . 6 Digital Media Slot Suppor ts Secure Digital (SD) Memor y Cards and MultiMediaCards (MMC). 7 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound. 8 Displa y release latch Opens the computer . Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Pr oduct Desc ription The external components on the right side of the computer are sho w n belo w and described in T able 1-2. R ight-Si de Com ponents
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â9 Ta b l e 1 - 2 Right-Side Components Item Component Function 1 Smar t card slot Suppor ts optional smar t cards and Jav a⢠Cards. 2 MultiBa y II device Suppor ts an op tical disc. The type of optical drive v ar ies by computer model. 3 USB por t Connects USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cable , or connects an optional Exter nal MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBa y II must also be connected to an e x ternal power source . 4 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects an optional network cable. 5 RJ-11 (modem) jac k Conn ects the modem cab le.
1â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The external components on the left side of the computer are sho w n belo w and described in T able 1-3. Lef t -S ide Comp on en ts
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â11 Ta b l e 1 - 3 Left-Side Components Item Component Function 1 Exhaust v ent Provides airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o pre vent o verheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as an adjoining printer , or a soft surface , such as pillows or thic k r ugs or clothing, to blo ck ai r fl ow . 2 USB por ts (2) Connect USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant de vices to the computer using a standard USB cab le, or connect an optional External MultiBa y II to the computer . The MultiBay II must also be connected to an e xter nal pow er source. 3A u d i o - i n (microphone) jack Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo arr a y microphone, or monaural microphone . 4A u d i o - o u t (headphone) jack Produces computer s ound when connected to optional pow er stereo speakers , headphones, ear b uds, a headset, or tele vision audio . 5 PC Card slot Suppor ts optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Cards.
1â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The external components on the rear panel of the computer are sho w n belo w and described in T able 1-4. Re a r P a n e l Co mp o n en t s
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â13 T able 1-4 Rear P anel Components Item Component Function 1 Security cable slot Attaches an op tional security cable to the computer . Ã Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents ma y not prev ent a product from being mishandled or stolen. 2 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y . 3 Smar t adapter power connector Connects an A C adap ter or an optional pow er adapter . 4 S-Video-out jack Connects an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card. 5 Exter nal monitor por t Connects an optional V GA external monitor or projector .
1â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The standard ke yboard components of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-5. St andar d K e yboar d Components
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â15 T able 1-5 Standar d Ke yboard Components Item Component Function 1 fn ke y Ex e cutes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function ke y or the esc key . 2 caps lock ke y Enables caps loc k and tur ns on the caps loc k light. 3 f1 to f12 ke ys (12) P erf or m system and application tasks. When combined with the fn key , s ever al ke ys and buttons perf or m additional tasks as hotk eys . 4 num lock ke y Enables n umeric lock, tur ns on the embedded numeric ke ypad, and tur ns on the num loc k light. 5 Embedded ke ypad In Windo ws, can be used lik e the keys on an e xter nal numeric ke ypad. 6 Arrow k eys Mov es the cursor around the screen. 7W i n d o w s applications ke y In Windows , displays a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . 8 Windows logo k ey In Window s , displa ys the Windows Star t menu.
1â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The computer top components are sho wn below and described in T able 1-6. To p C o m p o n e n t s
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â17 T able 1-6 T op Components Item Component Function 1 P ow er button When the computer is: â Off , press to tur n on the computer . â On, briefly press to initiate hiber nation. â In standb y , br iefly press to resume from standby . â In hiber nation, briefly press to restore from hiber nation. If the system has st opped responding and Windows shutdo wn procedures cannot be used, press and hold f or 5 seconds to tur n off the computer . 2 Inf o Center button Launches In f o Center , which enables y ou to open v arious software solutions. 3 Wireless button T ur ns the wireless functionality on or off, but does not create a wireless connection. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 4 Presentation button T ur ns on the presentation feature . 5 V olume mute b utton Mutes or restores speaker v olume. 6 V olume down b utton Decreases speaker v olume. 7 V olume up bu tton Increases speaker v olume.
1â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The computer top components are sho wn below and described in T able 1-7. To p C o m p o n e n t s
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â19 T able 1-7 T op Components Item Component Function 1P o w e r l i g h t â On: The computer is on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby . â Blinking rapidly: An A C adapter with a higher pow er rating should be connected. â Off: The computer is off or in hiber nation. 2 Wireless light On: An integrat ed wireless de vice, such as a wireless local area network (LAN) de vice and/or a Bluetooth® de vice, is tur ned on. 3 Caps lock light On: caps lock is on. 4 Num loc k light On: num lock or the numeric ke ypad is on. 5 Finger print reader Allo ws a finger print logon to Windows instead of using a pass word.
1â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The computer pointing de vice components are sho wn below and described in T able 1-8. P ointing De vi ce Components
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â21 T able 1-8 P ointing Device Components Item Component Function 1 P ointing stick Mo ves the pointer and selects or activ ates items on the screen. 2 P ointing stick b utton s Function lik e the left, middle, and right buttons on an e xter nal mouse. 3 T ouchP ad Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Ca n be set to perf or m other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clic king. 4 T ouchP ad buttons Function like the left, middle , and r ight buttons on an e xter nal mouse. 5 T ouchP ad scroll zone Scrolls up or down.
1â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription The external components on the bottom of the computer are sho w n belo w and described in T able 1-9. Bottom Components Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components Item Component Function 1 Batter y ba y Holds the batter y . 2 Doc king connector Connects the computer to an optional doc king de vice. 3 Batter y release latches (2) Relea se the batter y from the batter y ba y . 4 Accessor y batter y connector Connects an optional HP Ultra-Capacity Batter y or HP Extended Lif e Batter y .
Pr oduct Desc riptio n Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 1â2 3 5 Exhaust v ents Pro vides airflow to cool inter nal components. Ã T o prev ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Use the computer only a hard, flat surf ace. Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as an adjoining printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillows or thic k rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow . 6 Hard drive ba y Holds the primar y hard dr iv e. 7 Memor y module compar tment Contains one memor y slot that suppor ts replaceable memory modules. 8 Bluetooth compar tment Contain s a Bluetooth de vice (select computer models only). 9 Serial number Identifies the computer . This number is needed when contacting customer suppor t. 10 Mini Card compar tment Holds an optional wireless LAN de vice. Ã T o prev ent an unresponsive system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice author ized f or use in your computer b y the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in your country . If you install a de vice and then receive a warning message, remov e the de vice to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc ription 1. 5 D e s i g n O v e r v i e w This section presents a design ov erview of k ey parts and features of the computer . Refer to Chapter 3, âIllustrated Parts Catalog, â to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, âRemo v al and Replacement Procedures, â for disassembly steps. The system board provides the follo wing de vice connections: â Audio â Display â Hard dri ve â Intel Core Duo and Core Solo processors â K eyboard and T ouchPad â Memory modules â Mini Card module â PC Card à CA UTION: T o pr operl y v entilate the compute r , allo w at least a 7 .6 -cm (3-inc h) clear ance on the left and ri ght side s of the com puter . The computer uses an electric fan for v entilation. The fan is controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to turn on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These conditions are af fected by high external temperatures, system po wer consumption, power management/battery conserv ation conf igurations, battery fast char gi ng, and software. Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on the left side of the computer .
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â1 2 T roubl e shooting à W ARNI NG: Only au thor i z ed techni ci ans tr ained by HP should r epair this equipmen t . All tr oubleshooting and r epair procedur es ar e detailed to allo w only subas sembl y-/module -lev el repair . Because of the comple xity of the indi vidual boar ds and subass emblie s, do not attempt to mak e repair s at the component le v el or modif icati ons to an y printed w iring boar d. Impr oper repair s can c r eate a safety ha z ard . An y indicati on of component r eplacement or pr inted w iring boar d modif icati on may v oid an y w arr ant y or e xc hange allo wance s. 2. 1 C omp uter Setu p Computer Setup is a system information and customization utility that can be used e ven when the operating system is not working or will not load. This utility includes settings that are not a v ailable in W indo ws. Using C ompu ter Setup Information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security , Diagnostics, or System Conf iguration menus: 1. T urn on or restart the computer . Press f10 while the F10 = R OM-Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer-left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, use the cursor control ke ys to na vigate to the System Conf iguration menu. â T o vie w navig ation information, press f1 . â T o return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc .
2â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide T r oublesho oting 2. Select the File , Security , Diagnostics, or System Conf iguration menu. 3. T o close Computer Setup and restart the computer: â Select File > Sa ve changes and exit , and then press enter . â or â â Select File > Ignore changes and exit, and then press enter . â or â â Select File > Restore defaults, and then press enter . 4. When you are prompted to conf irm your action, press f10 . Sele c ti n g f r om the F ile Me nu Ta b l e 2 - 1 File Menu Select T o Do This System Inf or mation â Vie w identification information about the computer , processor , memor y and cache size , and system ROM. â Vie w BIOS re vision, ke yboard controller v ersion, and batter y serial number inf or mation.
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â3 Selec ting fr om t he Securit y Menu Ta b l e 2 - 2 Security Menu Select T o Do This Setup P assw ord Enter , change, or delete an Setup pass word. P ow e r-On P ass word Enter , change, or delete a po wer-on pass word. P assw ord Options (P assw ord options can be selected only when a pow er-on pass word has been set.) Enable/disab le: â Stringent secur ity . â Requirement of pass word on restar t. DriveLoc k P assw ords Enable/disab le Dr iv eLock; change a DriveLoc k user or master pass word. â DriveLock Settings are accessible only when you enter Comput er Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. Smar t Card Secur ity Enab le/disable smart card power-on suppor t. â A setup password must be established to use this feature. TPM Embedded Security Enable/disab le: â Embedded security device state . â P ow er-on authenti cation suppor t. â A utomatic Dr iveLoc k suppor t. System IDs Estab lish: â Notebook asset trac king number . â Notebook ownership tags . Disk Sanitizer Estab lish f ast, optimum, or custom settings f or disk sanitizing. *Not applicable to SuperDisk LS-120 driv es.
2â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide T r oublesho oting Selec ting fr om th e Diagnostic s Menu Ta b l e 2 - 3 Diagnostics Men u Select T o Do This HDD Self-T est Options Run a quick co mprehensiv e self test on hard drives in the system that suppor t the test f eatures. Memor y Check Run a quick co mprehensiv e test on system memor y on the f ollowing categories: â W alking 0s â W alking 1s â High Address line testing â Alter nate P atter n testing
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â5 Selec ting from t he S y s tem Con figu rat ion Men u Ta b l e 2 - 4 System Configuration Menu Select T o Do This Language Change the Comp uter Setup language. Boot Options Enable/disab le Mult iBoot, which sets a star tup sequence that can includ e most bootab le devices and media in the system. De vice Configurations Enable/disab le: â Swap Fn / Ctrl k eys . â USB legacy suppor t. â BIOS DMA data transf ers. â F an Alwa ys on while on AC P ower . â Data Ex ecution Prev ention. â LAN P ow er sav e. Built-In De vice Options Enable/disab le: â Embedded WLAN De vice Radio. â Embedded Bluetooth De vice Radio. â LAN/WLAN Switching. â W ake on LAN from Off . P or t Options Enable/disab le: â USB P or t. â 1394 P or t. â CardBus Slot.
2â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide T r oublesho oting 2.2 T roubleshootin g Flo wc h arts Ta b l e 2 - 5 T roub leshooting Flowc har ts Over vie w Flowchart Description 2.1 âFlowchar t 2.1âInitial T roubleshootingâ 2.2 âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P o wer , P ar t 1â 2.3 âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P o wer , P ar t 2â 2.4 âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P o wer , P ar t 3â 2.5 âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P o wer , P ar t 4â 2.6 âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , P ar t 1â 2.7 âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , P ar t 2â 2.8 âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Do c king De vice (if applicable)â 2.9 âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loadingâ 2.10 âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1â 2.11 âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 2â 2.12 âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3â 2.13 âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Disk ette Dr iv eâ 2.14 âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Driveâ 2.15 âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , P ar t 1â 2.16 âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , P ar t 2â 2.17 âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De viceâ 2.18 âFlowchar t 2.18âNonfunctioning K eyboardâ 2.19 âFlowchar t 2.19âNonfunctioning P ointing De viceâ 2.20 âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connectionâ
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â7 Flo wc har t 2. 1âIniti al T roub leshootin g Connecting to network or modem? Begin troubleshooting. Is there power? Is the OS loading? Is there video? (no boot) Is there sound? Beeps, LEDs, or error messages? Keyboard/ pointing device working? Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â All drives working? Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N End N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchart 2.18âNonfunc- tioning K eyboardâ or âFlowchart 2.19âNonfunc- tioning P ointing De vice. â Check LED board, speaker connections. Go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2.2âNo P o w er , P ar t 1 1. Reset the power cables in the docking device and at the AC outlet. 2. Be sure the AC power source is active. 3. Be sure that the power strip is working. Done Remove from docking device (if applicable). Po we r u p on batter y power? Po we r u p on AC power? Power up in docking device? Po we r up on batter y power? Po we r u p in docking device? Done Reset power .* Reset power .* Po we r u p on AC power? N Y Y N N Y N N Y Y YN 1. On select computer models, there is a separate reset button. 2. On select computer models, the computer can be reset using th e standby switch and either the lid switch or the main power swit ch. *NOTES Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â No power (power LED is off).
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â9 Flo wc har t 2.3âNo P o w er , P ar t 2 Continued from âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Visually check for debris in batter y socket and cl ean if necessary . Done N Y Po we r o n ? Check batter y by recharging it, moving it to another computer , or replacing it. Po we r o n ? Done Y Replace power supply (if applicable). N Po we r o n ? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â
2â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2.4âNo P o w er , P ar t 3 Continued from âFlowchart 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Reseat AC adapter in computer and at po wer sourc e. Internal or external AC adapter? Done Done Done Done Po we r o n ? Po we r o n ? Po we r o n ? Plug directly into AC outlet. Po we r L E D on? Po we r o u tl et active? T r y different outlet. Replace external AC adapter . Replace power cord. Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N External Internal Go to âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , Pa r t 4 . â
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â11 Flowc ha r t 2.5 âN o P o wer , P a r t 4 Y N Continued from âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Reseat loose components and boards and replace damaged items. Open computer . Loose or damaged parts? Y Close computer and retest. Po we r on ? Done N Replace the following items (if applicable). Check computer operation after each replacement: 1. Internal DC-DC converter* 2. Internal AC adapter 3. Processor board* 4. System board* *NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent shorting out among components.
2â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2.6âNo Vid eo, P ar t 1 A N Stand-alone or docking device? No video. Replace the following one at a time. T est after each replacement. 1. Cable between computer and computer display (if applicable) 2. Display 3. System board Internal or external display*? Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Docking Device Internal Stand-alone External Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Y Press lid swi tc h to ensu re operation. Video OK? Done Y N Video OK? Done Done N Check for bent pins on cable. Tr y another display . Internal and external video OK? Replace system board. YY N N *NOTE: T o change from internal to external display , use the hotkey combination. Y Go to âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , Pa r t 2 . â
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â13 Flo wc har t 2.7âNo Vid eo, P ar t 2 Y N Continued from âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Done Adjust external monitor display . Video OK? Adjust display brightness. Video OK? Video OK? Done Done Check that computer is properly seated in docking device, for bent pins on cable, and for monitor connection. Go to âA â in âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Check brightness of external monitor . T r y another external monitor . Internal and external video OK? Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â Y Y Y N N N Remove computer from docking device, if connected.
2â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting F lo w cha rt 2 . 8 â No nf un cti on in g D ock in g D e v ic e (i f appl icable) Y N Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. N T est replacement docking device with new computer . Check voltage setting on docking device. Reset monitor cable connector at docking device. Reinstall computer into docking device. Docking device operating? Docking device operating? Replace docking device. Done Done Y Nonfunctioning docking device.
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â15 Flo wc har t 2.9âNo O peratin g S y stem (OS) Loadin g No OS loading from hard drive, go to âFlowchart 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1. â Reset power cord in docking device and power outlet. No OS loading.* *NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always check cable connections, cable ends, and drives for bent or damaged pins. No OS loading from diskette drive, go to âFlowchart 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive, go to âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Drive. â No OS loading from network, go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2. 1 0âN o OS Loadin g , Hard Driv e, Pa r t 1 Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Done N OS not loading from hard drive. Nonsystem disk message? Go to âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Reseat external hard drive. OS loading? Done Boot from CD? Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Boot from hard drive? Boot from diskette? Change boot priority through the Setup Utility and reboot. Boot from hard drive? Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Check the Setup utility for correct booting order .
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â17 Flowc h ar t 2. 1 1âN o O S Lo ad in g , H a rd D riv e, Pa r t 2 Load OS using Operating System disc (if applicable). Continued from âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 1. â Reseat hard drive. Done CD or diskette in drive? 1. Replace hard drive. 2. Replace system board. Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Format hard drive and bring to ab o o t a b l e C:\ prompt. Create partition, and then format hard drive to bootable C:\ prompt. Boot from diskette drive? Remove diskette and reboot. Y N Boot from hard drive? Y N Y N Hard drive accessible? Y N Hard drive accessible? Done Run FDISK. Y N Hard drive partitioned? Hard drive formatted? Y N Y N Computer booted? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 3. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3. â
2â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2. 1 2âN o OS Loadin g, H ard Driv e, Pa r t 3 Y System files on hard drive? Continued from âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Clean virus. Done N Install OS and reboot. Virus on hard drive? OS loading from hard drive? Y N Y N Y N Diagnostics on diskette? Replace hard drive. Run diagnostics and follow recommendations. Run SCANDISK and check for bad sectors. Can bad sectors be fixed? Replace hard drive. Y N Y N Fix ba d sectors. Boot from hard drive? Replace hard drive. Done
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â19 Flo wc har t 2. 1 3âNo OS Loadin g , Disk et te Driv e Done Y N Reseat diskette drive. OS not loading from diskette drive. Done Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N OS loading? Nonsystem disk message? Bootable diskette in drive? Install bootable diskette and reboot computer . Check diskette for system files. Tr y d i f f e r e n t diskette. 1. Replace diskette drive. 2. Replace system board. Nonsystem disk error? OS loading? Boot from another device? Enable drive and cold boot computer . Is diskette drive boot order correct? Change boot priority using the Setup Utility . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Diskette drive enabled in the Setup Utility? Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
2â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2. 1 4âNo OS Load ing , Opti cal Driv e Y Done N Bootable disc in drive? Disc in drive? No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. Install bootable disc and reboot computer . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Install bootable disc. Boots from CD or DVD? Boots from CD or DVD? T r y another bootable disc. Booting from another device? Booting order correct? Correct boot order using the Setup Utility . Done Reseat drive. Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â21 Flo wc har t 2. 1 5âNo Au dio, P ar t 1 No audio. N Computer in docking device (if applicable)? Internal audio? Audio? Done Undock Audio? Done T urn up audio internally or externally . Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Y Y Y N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Replace the docking device.
2â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2. 1 6 âNo Audio, P ar t 2 YN Continued from âFlowchart 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Reload audio drivers. Audio driver in OS configured? Audio? Y Y Y N N N Correct drivers for application? Connect to external speaker . Load drivers and set configuration in OS. Audio? Done Replace audio board and speaker connections in computer (if applicable). 1. Replace internal speakers. 2. Replace audio board (if applicable). 3. Replace system board.
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â2 3 Flo wc har t 2. 1 7 âNonfunc tioning D e vice Done Any physical device detected? Y N Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the computer and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins or other damage. Reseat device. Clear CMOS. Done Fix o r replace broken item. Nonfunctioning device. Reattach device. Close computer , plug in power , and reboot. Device boots properly? Go to âFlowchart 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Device boots properly? Replace hard drive. Replace diskette drive. Replace NIC. If integrated NIC, replace system board. Y N Y N
2â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2. 1 8âNonfunc tionin g K e yboard Y N OK? Keyboard not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external keyboard. Reseat internal keyboard connector (if applicable). Replace internal keyboard or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
T r oublesho oting Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 2â2 5 Flo wc har t 2. 1 9âN onfunc tioning P ointing De vice Y N OK? Pointing device not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external pointing device. Reseat internal pointing device connector (if applicable). Replace internal pointing device or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done
2â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oublesho oting Flo wc har t 2.20âNo Net w ork/Modem Con nectio n Y Disconnect all power from the computer and open. No network or modem connection. N Done Digital line? Network or modem jack active? Replace jack or have jack activated. Connect to nondigital line. NIC/modem configured in OS? Reload drivers and reconfigure. Reseat NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace the NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace system board. OK? OK? Done N N N N Y Y Y Y
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â1 3 I llus trated P ar ts C atal og This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdo wn and a reference for spare part numbers. 3. 1 Serial N umber Location When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the computer serial number and computer model number located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number Location
3â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Illustrated P art s Catalog 3.2 Comp uter M ajor Com ponen ts Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â3 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components Item Description Spare P ar t Number 1 Display assemb lies (include wireless antenna transceivers and cab les) 14.1-inch, WXGA 14.1-inch, WXGA 418907-001 418896-001 Ref er to Section 3.3, âDispla y Assembly Components, â fo r di s p l ay assemb ly inter nal component spare par t number inf or mation. 2 Switch co ver 418900-001 3 P ower b utton board (includes po wer b utton board cab le) 418908-001 4 Ke yboards Fo r u s e i n : Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pa n Ko r e a 418910-A41 418910-201 418910-221 418910-081 418910-051 418910-121 418910-041 418910-151 418910-211 418910-DD1 418910-021 418910-BB1 418910-061 418910-291 418910-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden/Finland Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 418910-161 418910-091 418910-131 418910-251 418910-171 418910-231 418910-BA1 418910-071 418910-101 418910-111 418910-AB1 418910-281 418910-141 418910-031 418910-001
3â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â5 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number Cable Kit 418876-001 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e Includes: P ointing stick cab le T ouchP ad cable Modem cable A udio cable Bluetooth cable 6 RTC battery 418880-001 7 Micr ophone 418903-001 8 T op co ver (includes T ouchP ad, smar t card reader , and finger print sensor board) 418882-001 Plastics Kit 418877-001 9a 9b 9c 9d 9e PC Card slot bezel Hard drive co ver Memor y cov er Mini Card cov er Bluetooth cov er 10 PC Car d/digital media board 418884-001 11 Modem module 418849-001 12 Memory modules , 1-DIMM PC2-5300 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418857-001 418856-001 418855-001 418854-001 PC2-4200 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418853-001 418852-001 418851-001 418850-001 13 Mini Car d WW AN module 418860-001
3â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â7 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 14 F an assembly 418886-001 15 System boards (include thermal grease, alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) F or use with heat sink with spare par t number 418887-001 F or use with heat sink with spare par t number 418930-001 418904-001 418931-001 16 Heat sinks (include ther mal grease , alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) F or use with discrete system board (spare par t number 418904-001) F or use with UMA system boa rd (spare par t n umber 418931-001) 418887-001 418930-001 17 Processor s (include ther mal grease, al cohol pad, and thermal pad) Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.17-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor 418874-001 418870-001 418869-001 418868-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.6 6-GHz) processor 418885-001 18 Speaker 418883-001 19 MultiBa y II eject assembly 418905-001 20 Base encl osure (includes LED boar d and LED board cab le) 418881-001 21 LED boar d (includes LED board cable) 418901-001
3â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â9 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 22 Hard drives 7200 r pm 60 GB 418861-001 5400 r pm 100 GB 80 GB 60 GB 40 GB 418863-001 418862-001 418859-001 418858-001 23 MultiBa y II drives (include bezel) D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La y er Combo Drive D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive D VD-ROM driv e 418866-001 418865-001 418864-001 24 Battery 8-cell, 5.1-AH 4-cell, 2.5-AH 418867-001 418871-001
3â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â11 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 25 Mini Car d WLAN modules 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Nor th Amer ica 407107-001 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countr ies are categor ized as the rest of the world (RO W). 407107-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan 407107-291 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407108-001 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countr ies are categor ized as the rest of the world (RO W). 407108-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Japan 407108-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countrie s are categor ized as most of the world (MO W 1). 407576-001 Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico New Zealand Pa r a g u ay Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam
3â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â13 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 25 Mini Car d WLAN modules (Continued) 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countrie s are categor ized as most of the world (MO W 2). 407576-002 Aruba A ustr ia Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countr ies are categor ized as the rest of the world (RO W). 407576-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in Japan 407576-291 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in K orea 407576-AD1
3â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog Com put er Maj or Com ponents
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â15 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 25 Mini Car d WLAN modules (Continued) 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the follo wing countries: 409250-004 Israel Jordan Ku wa i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine 26 Bluetooth® module (includes Bluetooth module cab le) 409993-001
3â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 3 .3 Di s pla y Asse mbl y Co mpone nts
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â17 T able 3-2 Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P ar t Number 1 Display bezel 418889-001 2 Display panels 14.1-inch, WXGA 14.1-inch, WXGA 418891-001 418890-001 3 Display Hinge Kit 418902-001 4 Display In ver ter 418888-001 5 Wireless Antenna Kit 418899-001 6 Display enclosure 418895-001 Not illustrated: Display Brac ket Kit (includes left display br ack et) Display Cab le Kit (for use with 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y panel) Display Cab le Kit (for use with 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y panel) Display Scre w Kit Display Rubber Kit (includes all displa y bezel rubber and mylar scre w cov ers) 418894-001 418898-001 418897-001 418892-001 418893-001
3â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 3.4 P l asti c s Kit
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â19 T able 3-3 Plastics Kit Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P ar t Number Plastics Kit Includes: 418877-001 1 PC Card slot bezel 2 Hard dr iv e cov er (includes 2 capt ive scre ws, captured b y C clips) 3 Memor y module compar tment co v e r (includes 1 captiv e screw , captured by C clip) 4 Mini Card module compar tment co ver (includes 1 captiv e screw , captured by C clip) 5 Bluetooth module cove r (includes 1 captiv e screw , captured by C clip) 6 Computer feet (4)
3â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 3.5 Ca bl e Kit Ta b l e 3 - 4 Cable Kit Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P ar t Number Cable Kit Includes: 418876-001 1 P ointing stic k cable 2 Bluetooth module cabl e 3 A udio cable 4 Modem module cable 5 T ouchP ad cable
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â21 3.6 M a s s St ora ge D e vi ce s Ta b l e 3 - 5 Mass Storage Devices Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P ar t Number 1 Hard drives (include fr ame and connector) 7200 r pm 60 GB 418861-001 5400 r pm 100 GB 80 GB 60 GB 40 GB 418863-001 418862-001 418859-001 418858-001 2 Optical drives (include bezel) D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La y er Combo Drive D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive D VD-ROM driv e 418866-001 418865-001 418864-001
3â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 3.7 Miscell an eous (Not I llustra ted) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P ar t Inf ormation Description Spare P ar t Number 90-watt non-PFC A C adapter 418873-001 90-watt PFC A C adapter 418875-001 65-watt PFC A C adapter 418872-001 External MultiBa y II 366143-001 External MultiBa y II power cable and stand 366144-001 HP Extended Life Battery 367456-001 HP Doc king Station 374803-001 HP Doc king Station Miscellaneous Plastics Kit 380089-001 Label Kit 418879-001 MultiBay 8X D VD-ROM Drive 373314-001 MultiBay 24X D V D/CD-R W Combo Drive 373315-001 Nylon carrying case 325814-001
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â2 3 P ower cor ds: F or use in the United States 350055-001 F or use in Australia 350055-011 F or use in Europe 350055-021 F or use in the United Kingdom 350055-031 F or use in Italy 350055-061 F or use in Denmar k 350055-081 F or use in Brazil 350055-201 F or use in Japan 350055-291 F or use in the P eopleâ s Republic of China 350055-AA1 F or use in Korea 350055-AD1 F or use in Israel 350055-BB1 F or use in Switzerl and 350055-BG1 F or use in F rench Canada 350055-DB1 Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P ar t Information (Continued) Description Spare P ar t Number
3â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog USB 1.1 diskette drive 359118-001 Screw Kit (includes the f ollowing scre ws; refer to Appendix A, âScrew Listing, â for more inf or mation on specifications and usage) 418878-001 â Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã17.0 scre w â Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded scre w â Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 screw â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã19.0 screw â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã9.0 screw â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 screw â T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 screw Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P ar t Information (Continued) Description Spare P ar t Number
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â2 5 3.8 Sequ enti al P ar t Number Lis ting Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing Spare P ar t Number Description 325814-001 Nylon carr ying case 350055-001 P ow er cord f or use in the United States 350055-011 P ow er cord f or use in A ustralia 350055-021 P ow er cord f or use in Europe 350055-061 P ow er cord f or use in Italy 350055-031 P ow er cord f or use in the United Kingdom 350055-081 P ow er cord f or use in Denmark 350055-201 P ow er cord f or use in Brazil 350055-291 P ow er cord f or use in Japan 350055-AA1 P ow er cord f or use in the P eopleâ s Republ ic of China 350055-AD1 P ow er cord f or use in K orea 350055-BB1 P ow er cord for use in Isra el 350055-BG1 P ower cord f or use in Switzerland 350055-DB1 P ow er cord f or use in F rench Canada 359118-001 USB 1.1 diskette driv e 366143-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II 366144-001 Exter nal MultiBa y II power cab le and stand 367456-001 HP Extended Lif e Batter y 374803-001 HP Docking Station 380089-001 HP Docking Station Miscellaneous Plastics Kit
3â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 407107-001 802.11b/g HS WLAN Mi ni Card module f or use in Nor th Amer ica 407107-002 802.11b/g HS WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the RO W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407107-291 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan 407108-001 802.11b/g LJ WLAN m odule f or use in Nor th America 407108-002 802.11b/g LJ WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the RO W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407108-291 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Japan 407576-001 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the MOW1 countries listed below: Antigua & Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u ay Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â2 7 407576-002 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the MO W2 countries listed below: Aruba A ustr ia Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus The Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger man y Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux e mbourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 407576-003 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN Mini Card module f or use in the RO W countries listed below: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407576-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN Mini Card module f or use in Japan 409250-004 802.11b/g GL WLAN Mini Ca rd module for use in the f ollowing countries: Israel Jordan Ku wa i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine 409993-001 Bluetooth module (i ncludes Bluetooth module cable) 418849-001 Modem module 418850-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200, 256-MB memor y module Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
3â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 418851-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200, 512-MB memor y module 418852-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200 , 1024-MB memor y module 418853-001 1-DIMM, PC2-4200 , 2048-MB memor y module 418854-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300, 256-MB memor y module 418855-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300, 512-MB memor y module 418856-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300 , 1024-MB memor y module 418857-001 1-DIMM, PC2-5300 , 2048-MB memor y module 418858-001 5400-r pm, 40-GB hard drive 418859-001 5400-r pm, 60-GB hard drive 418860-001 Mini Card WW AN module 418861-001 7200-r pm, 60-GB hard drive 418862-001 5400-r pm, 80-GB hard drive 418863-001 5400-r pm, 100-GB hard drive 418864-001 8X D VD-ROM Drive 418865-001 24X D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive 418866-001 D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Driv e 418867-001 8-cell, 5.1-AH batter y 418868-001 Intel Core Du o T2300 (1.67-GHz) proc essor (includes thermal paste) 418869-001 Intel Core Du o T2400 (1.83-GHz) proc essor (includes thermal paste) 418870-001 Intel Core Du o T2500 (2.00-GHz) proc essor (includes thermal paste) 418871-001 4-cell, 2.5-AH batter y Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â2 9 418872-001 65-watt A C adapter 418873-001 90-watt non-PFC A C adapter 418874-001 Intel Core Du o T2600 (2.17-GHz) proc essor (includes thermal paste) 418875-001 90-watt PFC A C adapter 418876-001 Cable Kit 418877-001 Plastics Kit 418878-001 Screw Kit 418879-001 Label Kit 418880-001 R TC batter y 418881-001 Base enclosure 418882-001 T op cov er with 3 pointi ng stick b uttons and 3 T ouchP ad b uttons, f or use with ke yboards with P ointing Stick 418883-001 Speaker 418884-001 PC Card/digital media board 418885-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.67-GHz) processor (includes ther mal paste) 418886-001 F an assembly 418887-001 Heat sink (i ncludes ther mal paste) 418887-001 Heat sink f or use with di screte system board (spare par t number 418904-001, includes t hermal grease, alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) 418888-001 Displa y Inv er t er 418889-001 Displa y bezel Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
3â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Illustrated P art s Catalog 418890-001 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y panel 418891-001 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y panel 418892-001 Displa y Screw Kit 418893-001 Displa y Rubber Kit 418894-001 Displa y Brac ket Kit 418895-001 Displa y enclosure 418896-001 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y assembly (includes wireless antenna transceiv ers and cables) 418897-001 Displa y Cable Kit f o r use with WXGA displa y panel 418898-001 Displa y Cable Kit f o r use with WXGA displa y panel 418899-001 Wireless Antenna Kit 418900-001 Switch cov er 418901-001 LED board (includes LED board cable) 418902-001 Displa y Hinge Kit 418903-001 Microphone 418904-001 System board f o r use with heat sink with spare par t number 418887-001 (includes ther ma l grease , alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) 418905-001 MultiBa y II eject assembly 418907-001 14.1-inch, WXGA displa y assembly (includes wireless antenna transceiv ers and cables) 418908-001 P ow er button board (includes po wer button board cab le) 418910-001 K eyboard f or us e in the United States 418910-021 K eyboard f or inter national use Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 3â31 418910-031 K eyboard f or use in the United Kingdom 418910-041 K eyboard f o r use in Ger many 418910-051 K eyboard f or use in F rance 418910-061 K eyboard f or use in Italy 418910-071 K eyboard f or use in Spain 418910-081 K eyboard f or use in Denmar k 418910-091 K eyboard f or use in Norwa y 418910-101 K eyboard f or use in Sweden/Finland 418910-111 K eyboard f or use in Switzerland 418910-121 K eyboard f or use in F rench Canada 418910-131 K eyboard f o r use in P or tugal 418910-141 K eyboard f or use in T urke y 418910-151 K eyboard f or use in Greece 418910-161 K eyboard f or use in Latin Amer ica 418910-171 K eyboard f or use in Saudi Arabia 418910-201 K eyboard f or use in Brazil 418910-211 K eyboard f or use in Hungar y 418910-221 K eyboard f or us e in the Czech Repub lic 418910-231 K eyboard f or use in Slov akia 418910-251 K eyboard f or use in Russia 418910-281 K eyboard f o r use in Thailand 418910-291 K eyboard f or use in Japan Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
3â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P art s Catalog 418910-A41 K e yboard f o r use in Belgium 418910-AB1 K eyboard f or use in T aiw an 418910-AD1 K eyboard f or use in K orea 418910-BA1 K eyboard f o r use in Slov enia 418910-BB1 K eyboard f or use in Israel 418910-DD1 K eyboard f o r use in Iceland 418930-001 Heat sink f or use with UM A system board (spare par t n u mber 418931-001, includes ther mal grease , alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) 418931-001 System board f o r use with heat sink with spare par t number 418930-001 (includes ther ma l grease , alcohol pad, and ther mal pad) Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P ar t Number Listing (Continued) Spare P ar t Number Description
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 4â1 4 Remo v al an d R ep la cemen t Preliminaries This chapter provides essential information for proper and safe remov al and replacement service. 4. 1 T oo ls Required Y ou will need the follo wing tools to complete the remov al and replacement procedures: â Magnetic scre wdriv er â Phillips P0 and P1 scre wdriv ers â T orx8 screwdri ver â Flat-bladed scre wdriv er
4â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ies 4.2 Ser vice C onsidera tions The follo wing sections include some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. â As you remov e each subassembly from the computer , place the subassembly (and all accompanying scre ws) aw ay from the work area to pre vent damage. Pl a s t i c P a r t s Using excessi ve force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts. Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance instructions. C abl es and Conn ec tors à CA UTION: When se rvi c ing the compute r , be sur e that cables ar e placed in their pr oper locatio ns during the r eass embl y pr ocess . Impr oper cable placement can damage the com puter . Cables must be handled with extreme care to a void damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during remov al and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whene ver possible. In all cases, a void bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Be sure that cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged b y parts being remov ed or replaced. Handle flex cables w ith e xtreme care; these cables tear easily .
Re mov al and Replacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 4â3 4. 3 Pr e v enti ng Damage t o R emo v able D ri v es Remov able dri ves are fragile components that must be handled with care. T o pre vent damage to the computer , damage to a remov able dri ve, or loss of information, observe the follo wing precautions: â Before removing or inserting a hard dri ve, shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. â Before removing a disk ette driv e or optical driv e, be sure that a diskette or disc is not in the dri ve and be sure that the optical dri ve tray is closed. â Before handling a dri ve, be sure that you are discharged of static electricity . While handling a dri ve, a void touching the connector . â Handle dri ves on surfaces co vered with at least one inch of shock-proof foam. â A void dropping dri ves from an y height onto any surf ace. â After removing a hard dri ve, an optical dri ve, or a disk ette dri ve, place it in a static-proof bag. â A void e xposing a hard dri ve to products that ha ve magnetic f ields, such as monitors or speakers. â A void e xposing a dri ve to temperature e xtremes or liquids. â If a dri ve must be mailed, place the dri ve in a b ubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protecti ve packaging and label the package âFRA GILE: Handle W ith Care. â
4â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ies 4.4 Pr e v enting El ec tr osta tic D ama ge Many electronic components are sensiti ve to electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensiti vity . Networks b uilt into many inte grated circuits provide some protection, b ut in many cases, the dischar ge contains enough po wer to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions. A sudden dischar ge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensiti ve de vices or microcircuitry . Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, b ut damage occurs. An electronic de vice exposed to electrostatic dischar ge might not be af fected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the de vice might function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life e xpectancy .
Re mov al and Replacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 4â5 4.5 P ac k a ging an d T ranspor tin g Precautions Use the follo wing grounding precautions when packaging and transporting equipment: â T o av oid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes. â Protect all electrostatic-sensiti ve parts and assemblies with conducti ve or approv ed containers or packaging. â K eep electrostatic-sensitiv e parts in their containers until the parts arri ve at static-free workstations. â Place items on a grounded surface before remo ving items from their containers. â Alw ays be properly grounded when touching a sensiti ve component or assembly . â Store reusable electrostatic-sensiti ve parts from assemblies in protecti ve packaging or nonconducti ve foam. â Use transporters and con ve yors made of antistatic belts and roller b ushings. Be sure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to a v oid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
4â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ies 4.6 W orksta tion Precau tions Use the follo wing grounding precautions at workstations: â Cov er the workstation with approv ed static-shielding material (refer to T able 4-2, âStatic-Shielding Materialsâ ). â Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. â Use conducti ve f ield service tools, such as cutters, scre wdriv ers, and v acuums. â When f ixtures must directly contact dissipati ve surf aces, use f ixtures made only of static-safe materials. â K eep the work area free of nonconducti ve materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. â Handle electrostatic-sensiti ve components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. â A void contact with pins, leads, or circuitry . â T urn of f power and input signals before inserting or remo ving connectors or test equipment.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 4â7 4.7 Groundin g Eq uip ment an d Methods Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. â When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. T o provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap. â When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conducti ve floors or dissipati ve floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. T o be ef fecti ve, the conducti ve strips must be worn in contact with the skin. Other grounding equipment recommended for use in pre venting electrostatic damage includes: â Antistatic tape â Antistatic smocks, aprons, and slee ve protectors â Conducti ve bins and other assembly or soldering aids â Nonconducti ve foam â Conducti ve tabletop workstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance â Static-dissipati ve tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground â Field service kits â Static aw areness labels â Material-handling packages â Nonconducti ve plastic bags, tubes, or boxes â Metal tote boxes â Electrostatic v oltage le vels and protecti ve materials
4â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ies T able 4-1 sho ws ho w humidity af fects the electrostatic voltage le vels generated by dif ferent acti vities. T able 4-2 lists the shielding protection provided b y antistatic bags and floor mats. Ta b l e 4 - 1 T ypical Electro static V oltage Levels Relative Humidity Event 10% 40% 55% W alking across car pet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V W alking across vinyl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vin yl tra y 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrof oam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing b ubble pac k from PCB 26,500 V 2 0,000 V 7,000 V P acking PCBs in f oam-lined bo x 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V â A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Ta b l e 4 - 2 Static-Shielding Materials Material Use V oltage Protection Level Antistatic plastic Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic F loor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â1 5 Remo v al an d R ep la cemen t Pr ocedure s This chapter provides remo val and replacement procedures. There are as many as 81 scre ws, in 14 dif ferent sizes, that must be remov ed, replaced, or loosened when servicing the computer . Make special note of each scre w size and location during remov al and replacement. Refer to Appendix A, âScre w Listingâ for detailed information on scre w sizes, locations, and usage.
5â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 Seria l Number Report the computer serial number to HP when requesting information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Number Location
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â3 5 .2 Disasse mbl y Sequenc e Chart Use the chart belo w to determine the section number to be referenced when removing computer components. Disassembl y Sequence Char t Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.3 Preparing the Computer f or Disassemb ly Batter y 0 5.4 Hard Driv e 2 loosened to remov e the hard drive co ver 1 loosened to remov e the hard drive 4 to disassemble the hard drive 5.5 Computer F eet 0 5.6 Bluetooth Module 1 loosened 5.7 External Memor y Module 1 loosened to remove the memor y module compar tment cov er 5.8 Mini Card WLAN Module 1 loosened to remov e the Mini Card module compar tment cov er 2 remov ed to remov e the Mini Card WLAN module à T o prev ent an unresponsive system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in your computer b y the governmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in your countr y . If you install a de vice and then receiv e a warning message, remov e the device to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 5.9 MultiBa y II De vice 1
5â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.10 Key b o a r d 3 5.11 RT C B a t t e r y 0 5.12 Inter nal Memor y Module 0 5.13 Modem Module 2 5.14 Mini Card WW AN Module 2 5.15 Switch Cov er 6 5.16 P ow er Button Board 2 5.17 F an Assemb ly 1 5.18 Heat Sink 6 loosened 5.19 Processor 1 loosened 5.20 Displa y Assembly Displa y bezel Displa y hinges Displa y panel Displa y inv er ter Wireless antenna transceiv ers 7 4 4 6 0 2 5.21 To p C o v e r 12 5.22 PC Card/Digital Media Board 3 5.23 Speaker 0 5.24 Microphone 0 5.25 System Board 6 5.26 MultiBa y II Eject Assembly 1 Disassembl y Sequence Char t (Continued)
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â5 5 .3 Preparing t he C omp uter for Di sassem bl y Before you begin an y remov al or installation procedures: 1. Shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is of f or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the computer . 3. Disconnect the po wer cord.
5â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 4. Remov e the battery by follo wing these steps: a. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. b . Slide the battery release latch on the right 1 and then the battery release latch on the left 2 to release the battery . c. Slide the battery 3 straight back and remov e it. R emo ving the Battery Re verse the abov e procedure to install the battery . Battery Spare P a rt Number Information 8-cell, 5.1-AH 4-cell, 2.5-AH 418867-001 418871-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â7 5 .4 Hard Driv e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. Har d Drive Spare P ar t Number Information 7200 r pm 60 GB 418861-001 5400 r pm 100 GB 80 GB 60 GB 40 GB 418863-001 418862-001 418859-001 418858-001
5â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Loosen the two Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ve cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the right side of the hard dri ve cov er 2 and swing it up and to the left. 5. Remov e the hard driv e cov er . â The hard dri ve cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 418877-001. R emo ving the Har d Dri ve C ov er
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â9 6. Loosen the Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 spring-loaded hard dri ve retention scre w 1 . 7. Grasp the mylar tab 2 on the hard dri ve and slide the hard dri ve 3 to the left to disconnect it from the system board. 8. Remov e the hard driv e 4 from the hard driv e bay . R emo ving the Har d Dri ve
5â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 9. Remov e the four Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 hard driv e frame scre ws 1 from each side of the hard driv e. 10. Lift the frame 2 straight up to remov e if from the hard driv e. R emo ving the Har d Dri ve F r ame Re verse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the hard dri ve.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â11 5. 5 C o m p u t e r F e e t The computer feet are adhesi ve-backed rubber pads. The feet are included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 418877-001. Re p la ci n g t h e Co m pu t er Fee t
5â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .6 Bluetoot h Module 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Loosen the Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 scre w 1 that secures the Bluetooth module cov er to the computer . 3. Remov e the Bluetooth module cove r 2 . R emo v ing the Bluetooth Module Co ve r Bluetooth Module Spare P ar t Number Information Bluetooth module (includes Blue tooth module cab le) 409993-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â13 4. Slide the Bluetooth module 1 to the right until the left side of the module is clear of the left side of the clip in the base enclosure. 5. Swing the left side of the Bluetooth module 2 out of the base enclosure. 6. Slide the Bluetooth module 3 to the left until it is remov ed from the base enclosure. 7. Disconnect the Bluetooth module cable 4 from the Bluetooth module. 8. Remov e the Bluetooth module. â The Bluetooth module cable is included with the Bluetooth module spare part kit and is also a vailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. R emo v ing the Bluetooth Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install a Bluetooth module.
5â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .7 Exter nal M emor y Module 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation PC2-5300 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418857-001 418856-001 418855-001 418854-001 PC2-4200 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418853-001 418852-001 418851-001 418850-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â15 3. Loosen the Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 scre w 1 that secures the memory module compartment cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the right edge of the cov er 2 and swing it up and to the left. 5. Remov e the memory module compartment cove r . â The memory module compartment cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 418877-001. R emo v ing the Memor y Module Co mpartment Co ver
5â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 7. Slide the module 2 aw ay from the socket at an angle. 8. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with a notch 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Memor y Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install a memory module.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â17 5 .8 M ini Card WL AN Modul e Mini Car d WLAN Module Spare P ar t Number Information 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407107-001 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in the countr ies listed below . These countries are catego r ized as the rest of the w or ld (R O W). 407107-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g HS WLAN module f or use in Japan 407107-291 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Nor th America 407108-001 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or us e in the R O W countries listed below: 407108-002 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g LJ WLAN module f or use in Japan 407108-291 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f o r use in the countries listed below . These countries are catego r ized as most of the w or ld 1 (MO W1). 407576-001 Antigua & Barb uda Argentina Au s t ra l i a Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam
5â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f o r use in the countries listed below . These countries are catego r ized as most of the w or ld 2 (MO W2). 407576-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux e mbourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the RO W countr ies listed below: 407576-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11a/b/g GL WLAN module f or use in Japan 407576-291 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in K orea 407576-AD1 802.11b/g GL WLAN module f or use in the f ollowing countries: 409250-004 Israel Jordan Ku w a i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine Mini Car d WLAN Module Spare P ar t Number Info rmation (Continued)
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â19 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. 3. Loosen the Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 scre w 1 that secures the Mini Card module compartment cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the front of the cov er 2 and swing it up and tow ard the back of the computer . 5. Remov e the Mini Card module compartment cove r . â The Mini Card module compartment cov er is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 418877-001. R emo ving the Mini C ard Module C ompartment Co v er
5â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Make note of which wireless antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Card WLAN module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the auxiliary and main wireless antenna cables 1 from the Mini Card WLAN module. â The wireless antenna cables are a v ailable in the W ireless Antenna Kit, spare part number 418899-001. 7. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre ws 2 that secure the Mini Card WLAN module to the computer . (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 8. Remov e the Mini Card WLAN module 3 by pulling the module aw ay from the socket at an degree angle. â Mini Card modules are designed with a notch 4 to pre vent incorrect installation. R emo ving a Mini C ard WLAN Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card WLAN module.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â21 5. 9 M u l t i B a y I I D ev i c e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the left side to ward you. MultiBa y II Device Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation D VD±R W and CD-R W Double-La yer Combo Drive D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive D VD-ROM drive 418866-001 418865-001 418864-001
5â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 screw 1 that secures the MultiBay II de vice to the computer . 4. Push in on the right side of the MultiBay II de vice 2 . (The MultiBay II de vice partially protrudes from the MultiBay II.) 5. Slide the MultiBay II de vice 3 out of the computer . R emo ving the MultiBa y I I De v ice Re verse the abov e procedure to install an MultiBay II device.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â2 3 5. 1 0 Ke y b o a r d 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the front to ward you. Ke yboard Spare P ar t Number Inf o rmation Fo r u s e i n : Belgium Brazil The Czech Repub lic Denmark F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Inter nationally Israel Italy Ja pan Ko r e a 418910-A41 418910-201 418910-221 418910-081 418910-051 418910-121 418910-041 418910-151 418910-211 418910-DD1 418910-021 418910-BB1 418910-061 418910-291 418910-AD1 Latin America Norwa y P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov akia Slov enia Spain Sweden/Finland Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 418910-161 418910-091 418910-131 418910-251 418910-171 418910-231 418910-BA1 418910-071 418910-101 418910-111 418910-AB1 418910-281 418910-141 418910-031 418910-001
5â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the three T orx8 T8M2.5Ã11.0 screws that secure the ke yboard to the computer . R emo ving the K ey board S cr e w s
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â2 5 4. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Open the computer as far as possible. 6. Slide the four release tabs 1 on the rear edge of the ke yboard forward. 7. Lift the rear edge of the ke yboard 2 and swing it up to ward you until it rests on the palm rest. Re le a s i ng t h e K eyb oa rd
5â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 8. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector 1 to which the ke yboard cable is attached and disconnect the keyboard cable 2 . 9. Release the ZIF connector 3 to which the pointing stick cable is attached and disconnect the pointing stick cable 4 . 10. Remov e the keyboard. Disconnecting the K e yboar d and P ointing S tick C ables
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â2 7 11. If it is necessary to replace the pointing stick cable, turn the ke yboard upside down with the space bar to ward you. 12. Release the ZIF connector 1 to which the pointing stick cable is attached and disconnect the pointing stick cable 2 . â The pointing stick cable is included with all ke yboard spare part kits and is also a v ailabl e in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. R emo v ing the P ointing S tic k Cable Re verse the abov e procedure to install the keyboard.
5â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 1 R TC B a t t e r y â The R TC battery is included in the Plastics Kit, spare part number 418877-001. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Disconnect the R TC battery cable 1 from the system board and remov e the cable from the clips 2 in the top cov er . 4. Remov e the R TC battery 3 from the clip in the base enclosure. â The R TC battery is secured to the top cov er by two-sided tape. R emo ving the R T C Batter y Re verse the abov e procedure to install an R TC battery .
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â2 9 5 . 1 2 Internal M emor y Module 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation PC2-5300 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418857-001 418856-001 418855-001 418854-001 PC2-4200 2048 MB 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 418853-001 418852-001 418851-001 418850-001
5â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 4. Slide the module 2 aw ay from the socket at an angle. 5. Remov e the memory module. â Memory modules are designed with a notch 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Memor y Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install a memory module.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â31 5 . 1 3 Modem Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). Modem Module Spare P ar t Number Information Modem module 418849-001
5â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the modem module to the system board. 4. Lift the right side of the modem module 2 to disconnect it from the system board. 5. Disconnect the modem module cable 3 from the modem module. â The modem module cable is included in the modem module spare part kit and is also a v ailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. 6. Remov e the modem module. R emo ving the Modem Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install the modem module.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â3 3 5 . 1 4 M ini Card WW AN Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Release the ke yboard ( Section 5.10 ). Mini Car d WW AN Module Spare P ar t Number Information Mini Card WW AN module 418860-001
5â34 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Make note of which wireless antenna cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Card WW AN module before disconnecting the cables, then disconnect the auxiliary and main wireless antenna cables 1 from the Mini Card WW AN module. â The wireless antenna cables are a v ailable in the W ireless Antenna Kit, spare part number 418899-001. 4. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre ws 2 that secure the Mini Card WW AN module to the computer . (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 5. Remov e the Mini Card WW AN module 3 by pulling the module aw ay from the socket at an angle. â Mini Card modules are designed with a notch 4 to pre vent incorrect installation. R emo ving a Mini C ard WW AN Module Re verse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card WW AN module.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â3 5 5. 1 5 Sw i t c h C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. 4. Remov e the two T8M2.5Ã11.0 scre ws 1 and the four Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 scre ws 2 that secure the switch cover to the computer . R emo ving the S w itch C ov er Scr e w s Switch Co ver Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation Switch cov er 418900-001
5â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. T urn the computer display-side up with front to ward you. 6. Open the computer as far as possible. 7. Disconnect the po wer button board cable 1 from the system board. 8. Insert a thin flat-bladed tool under the hinge cov er sections 2 of the switch cov er and lift up until the switch cov er 3 disengages from the computer . 9. Remov e the switch cov er . R emo ving the S w itch C ov er Re verse the abov e procedure to install the switch cov er .
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â3 7 5. 1 6 P owe r B u t t o n B o a r d 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Remov e the switch cov er ( Section 5.15 ). 4. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the po wer button board to the switch cov er . 5. Remov e the power b utton board 2 from the switch cov er . R emo v ing the P o w er Button Boar d Re verse the abov e procedure to install the power b utton board. P ower Button Boar d Spare P ar t Number Information P ow e r b utton board (includes pow e r b utton board cab le) 418908-001
5â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 7 Fa n A s s e m b l y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.10 ). 3. Remov e the switch cov er ( Section 5.15 ). 4. Disconnect the fan cable 1 from the system board. 5. Remov e the T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 scre w 2 that secures the fan assembly to the base enclosure. 6. Remov e the fan assembly 3 from the computer . R emo ving the F an Assembl y Re verse the abov e procedure to install the fan assembly . F an Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information F an assembly 418886-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â3 9 5 . 1 8 Hea t Sink 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) Heat Sink Spare P ar t Number Information â All heat sink spare par t kits incl ude ther mal grease , alcohol pads, and ther mal pads. F or use with discrete system board (spare par t number 418904-001) F or use with UMA system board (spare par t number 418931-001) 418887-001 418930-001
5â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 2. Loosen the four Phillips PM2.0Ã10.0 scre ws 1 and the two Phillips PM2.0Ã13.0 scre ws 2 that secure the heat sink to the system board. 3. Remov e the heat sink 3 from the base enclosure. â Due to the adhesi ve quality of the thermal paste located between the heat sink and processor , it may be necessary to mov e the heat sink from side to side to detach the heat sink from the processor . R emo ving the Heat Sink
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â41 â The thermal paste and thermal pads should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the heat sink 1 , processor 2 , Chip1 3 , and Chip2 4 each time the heat sink is remov ed. Thermal paste and thermal pads are included with all heat sink, processor , and system board spare part kits. Ther mal P ast e and Ther mal P ad L ocations Re verse the abov e procedure to install the heat sink.
5â4 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 9 P r o c e s s o r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) Pr ocessor Spare P ar t Number Information Intel Core Duo T2600 (2.17-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2500 (2.00-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2400 (1.83-GHz) processor Intel Core Duo T2300 (1.67-GHz) processor 418874-001 418870-001 418869-001 418868-001 Intel Core Solo T1300 (1.6 6-GHz) processor 418885-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â43 2. Use a flat-bladed scre wdriv er to turn the processor locking scre w 1 one-half turn counterclockwise until you hear a click. 3. Lift the processor 2 straight up and remov e it. â The gold triangle 3 on the processor should be aligned with the triangle icon 4 on the processor socket when you install the processor. R emo v ing the Pr ocess or Re verse the abov e procedure to install the processor .
5â44 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .20 Displa y Asse mbl y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Disconnect the wireless ante nna cables from the Mini Card WLAN module ( Section 5.8 ). 3. Remov e the keyboard ( Section 5.10) . 4. Disconnect the wireless ante nna cables from the Mini Card WW AN module ( Section 5.14 ). 5. Remov e the switch cov er ( Section 5.15) . Displa y Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information 14.1-inch, WXGA 14.1-inch, WXGA 418907-001 418896-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â4 5 6. Close the computer and turn it upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. 7. Remov e the following scre ws: 1 T wo T orx8 T8M2.5Ã11.0 scre ws from the computer bottom 2 T wo T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 scre ws from the computer rear panel 3 One Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w from the computer battery bay R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y Scr ew s
5â46 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 8. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 9. Open the computer as far as it will open. 10. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the system board. 11. Remov e the wireless antenna cables 2 and 3 from the Mini Card compartment and the top cov er clips. Disconnecting the Dis pla y Cable and R emo v ing the Wi r eles s Ante nna Cab les
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â4 7 Ã CA UTION: Support the display as sembly w hen remo ving the f ollow ing sc r ew s. F ailur e to support the displa y assembl y can result in damage t o the displa y assembl y and other computer componen ts. 12. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 screws 1 that secure the display assembly to the computer . 13. Lift the display assembly 2 straight up and remov e it. R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y
5â4 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Displa y bezel 418889-001 Displa y panels 14.1-inch, WXGA 14.1-inch, WXGA 418891-001 418890-001 Displa y Hinge Kit 418902-001 Displa y Inv er ter 418888-001 Wireless Antenna Kit 418899-001 Displa y enclosure 418895-001 Displa y Brack et Kit (includes left display br ack et) Displa y Cable Kit (f or use with 14.1-inch, WXGA display panel) Displa y Cable Kit (f or use with 14.1-inch, WXGA display panel) Displa y Screw Kit Displa y Rubber Kit (includes all displa y bezel rubber and mylar screw co vers) 418894-001 418898-001 418897-001 418892-001 418893-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â4 9 14. Remov e the following: 1 and 2 four rubber scre w covers â The two rubber scre w cov ers 1 on the top edge of the display bezel are dif ferent from the two rubber scre w cov ers 2 on the bottom edge of the display bezel. Both types of rubber scre w covers are included in the Display Rubber Kit, spare part number 418893-001. 3 Four Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Scr e w s
5â5 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 15. Flex the insides edges of the left and right sides 1 and the top and bottom sides 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages from the display enclosure. 16. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Displa y bezel 418889-001 Displa y enclosure 418895-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â51 17. If it is necessary to replace the display hinges, remov e the Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre w 1 and the Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre w 2 that secure each hinge to the display enclosure. 18. Remov e the display hinges 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Hinges Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Displa y Hinge Kit 418902-001
5â5 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 19. Remov e the four mylar screw co vers 1 and the four Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 scre ws 2 that secure the display panel to the display enclosure. 20. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 3 that secure the display in verter to the display enclosure. 21. Remov e the display panel 4 and display in verter 5 from the display enclosure. R emo v ing the Displa y P anel Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Displa y panels 14.1-inch, WXGA 14.1-inch, WXGA 418891-001 418890-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â5 3 22. Disconnect the display 1 and backlight cables 2 from the in ve rter . 23. Remov e the in verter 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Inv erter Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Displa y Inv er ter 418888-001
5â54 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 24. If it is necessary to replace the wireless antenna transcei vers and cables, remov e the two T orx T8M2.5Ã4.0 screws 1 that secure the left and right transcei vers to the display enclosure. 25. Remov e the wireless antenna cables 2 from the clips in the display enclosure. 26. Detach the wireless antenna transcei vers 3 from the display enclosure. 27. Remov e the wireless antenna transceiv ers and cables. R emo ving the W irele ss An tenna T rans c e i ve rs and C ables Re verse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the display assembly Displa y Assembl y Components Spare P ar t Number Information Description Spare P ar t Number Wireless Antenna Kit 418899-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â5 5 5. 2 1 T o p C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) e. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) 2. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front tow ard you. T op Cover Spare P ar t Number Inf o rmation T op cover (includes T ouchPad , smart card reader , and finger print sensor board) 418882-001
5â5 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 3. Remov e the following: 1 T wo rubber scre w cov ers 2 Nine T orx8 T8M2.5Ã11.0 scre ws that secure the top cov er to the base enclosure 3 One Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w that secures the top cover to the base enclosure R emo ving the T op Co ve r Sc r ew s, P ar t 1
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â5 7 4. T urn the computer right-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Disconnect the follo wing cables from the system board: 1 T ouchPad cable 2 Fingerprint reader board cable 3 Smart card assembly cable Disconnecting the T op Co ve r Cables
5â5 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Remov e the microphone 1 from the clip in the top cov er and the cable 2 from the routing clips in the top cov er . Re le a s i ng t h e Mi crop h o ne
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â5 9 7. Remov e the two T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 screws that secure the top cov er to the base enclosure. R emo ving the T op Co ve r Sc r ew s, P ar t 2
5â60 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 8. Swing the rear edge of the top cov er 1 up and forward 2 until the left and right sides disengage from the base enclosure. 9. Remov e the top cove r 3 . R emo ving the T op Co ve r Re verse the abov e procedure to install the top cov er .
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â61 5 .2 2 P C C ard/Di gital Medi a Board 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) e. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) f. T op cov er ( Section 5.21 ) PC Car d/Digital Media Board Spare P ar t Number Information PC Card/digital media board 418884-001
5â6 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 2. Remov e the three Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 screws 1 that secure the PC Card/digital media board to the system board. 3. Lift up on the right side of the PC Card/digital media board 2 to disconnect the board from the system board. R emo ving the P C Car d/Digital Medi a Board
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â6 3 4. If it is necessary to remov e the PC Card assembly from the digital media board, disengage the hooks 1 on the PC Card assembly from the tabs on the digital media board. 5. Remov e the PC Card assembly 2 from the digital media board. R emo ving the P C Car d Asse mbly Re verse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the PC Card/digital media board.
5â64 Maintenance and Servi c e Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 23 S p e a k e r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) e. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) f. T op cov er ( Section 5.21 ) g. PC Card/digital media board ( Section 5.22 ) Speaker Spare P ar t Number Information Speak er 418883-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â65 2. Disconnect the speaker cable 1 from the system board. 3. Remov e the speaker 2 from the base enclosure. R emo ving the S peak er Re verse the abov e procedure to install the speaker .
5â6 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 24 M i c r o p h o n e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.15 ) c. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) d. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) e. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) f. T op cov er ( Section 5.21 ) g. PC Card/digital media board ( Section 5.22 ) Micr ophone Spare P ar t Number Information Microphone 418903-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â6 7 2. Disconnect the microphone cable 1 from the system board. 3. Remov e the microphone 2 from the base enclosure. R emo ving the Mi cr ophone Re verse the abov e procedure to install the microphone.
5â6 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 2 5 Sys t e m B o a rd â When replacing the system board, be sure that the follo wing components are remov ed from the defectiv e system board and installed on the replacement system board: â Memory modules ( Section 5.7 and Section 5.12 ) â Mini Card WLAN module ( Section 5.8 ) â R TC battery ( Section 5.11) â Modem module ( Section 5.13 ) â Mini Card WW AN module ( Section 5.14 ) â Processor ( Section 5.19 ) System Boar d Spare P ar t Number Information F or use with heat sink with spare par t number 418887-001 F or use with heat sink with spare par t number 418930-001 418904-001 418931-001
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â6 9 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Bluetooth board ( Section 5.6 ) c. MultiBay II de vice ( Section 5.9 ) d. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.15 ) f. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) g. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) h. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) i. T op co ver ( Section 5.21 ) j. PC Card/digital media board ( Section 5.22 ) k. Speaker ( Section 5.23 ) l. Microphone ( Section 5.24 )
5â7 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 2. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front tow ard you. 3. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 scre ws on each side of the hard dri ve connector that secure the system board to the base enclosure. R emo ving the S y stem Boar d Scr ew s, P art 1
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â71 4. T urn the computer right-side up with the front to ward you. 5. Remov e the audio board cables 1 from the space between the system board and the base enclosure. 6. Disconnect the audio board cable 2 from the system board. 7. Disconnect the Bluetooth module cable 3 from the system board and remov e the cable from the base enclosure. â The audio board and Bluetooth module cables are a v ailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. Disconnecting the S yst em Boar d Cables , P art 1
5â7 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 8. Disconnect the modem module cable 1 from the system board. â The modem module cable is a v ailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. 9. Release the ZIF connector 2 to which the LED board cable is attached and disconnect the LED board cable 3 from the system board. Disconnecting the S yst em Boar d Cables , P art 2
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â7 3 10. Remov e the four Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 screws that secure the system board to the base enclosure. R emo ving the S y stem Boar d Scr ew s, P art 2
5â7 4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 11. Use the hard dri ve connector 1 to lift the right side of the system board 2 until it rests at an angle. 12. Slide the system board 3 aw ay at an angle and remov e it. R emo ving the S y stem Boar d
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â7 5 13. If it is necessary to replace the audio cable, disconnect the cable from the three connectors on the system board and remov e the cable. â The audio cable is a v ailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. R emo ving the A udio C able
5â7 6 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 14. If it is necessary to replace the modem connector and cable, remov e the connector 1 from the clip in the base enclosure and remov e the cable 2 from the routing channel in the base enclosure. â The modem cable is a v ailable in the Cable Kit, spare part number 418876-001. R emo v ing the Modem Connec tor and Cable Re verse the abov e procedures to install the system board.
Re mov al and Replacement Pr ocedure s Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â77 5 .2 6 MultiBay II E jec t A ssemb ly 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Bluetooth board ( Section 5.6 ) c. MultiBay II de vice ( Section 5.9 ) d. K eyboard ( Section 5.10 ) e. Switch cov er ( Section 5.15 ) f. Fan assembly ( Section 5.17 ) g. Heat sink ( Section 5.18 ) h. Display assembly ( Section 5.20 ) i. T op co ver ( Section 5.21 ) j. PC Card/digital media board ( Section 5.22 ) k. Speaker ( Section 5.23 ) l. Microphone ( Section 5.24 ) m. System board ( Section 5.25 ) MultiBa y II Eject Assembl y Spare P ar t Number Information MultiBa y II eject assemb ly 418905-001
5â7 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 2. Remov e the Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 screw 1 that secures the MultiBay II eject assembly to the base enclosure. 3. Remov e the MultiBay II eject assembly 2 from the base enclosure. R emo v ing the MultiBay II E ject As sembl y Re verse the abov e procedure to install the MultiBay II eject assembly .
Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 6â1 6 Spec ifica tions This chapter provides physical and performance specif ications. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer Dimensions Metric U .S. Height (front to back) Width Depth 2.9 to 3.4 cm 33.1 cm 23.9 cm 1.1 to 1.3 in 13.0 in 9.4 in W eight 2.2 kg 4.9 lbs Input P ower Operating v oltage Operating current 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A â 65 W 19.0 V dc @ 4.74 A â 90 W 3.5 A or 4. 74 A T emperature Operating (not writing to optical disc) Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating 0°C to 35°C 5°C to 35°C -20°C to 60°C 32°F to 95°F 41°F to 95°F -4°F to 140°F
6â2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Spe cificat ion s Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90% 5% to 95% 10% to 90% 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia) -15 m to 3,048 m -15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft -50 ft to 40,000 ft Shock Operating Nonoperating 125 g, 2 ms, half-sine 200 g, 2 ms, half-sine Random Vibration Operating Nonoperating 0.75 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.25 oct/min s weep rate 1.50 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.5 oct/min s weep rate â Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The computer operates well within this range of temperatures. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â3 Ta b l e 6 - 2 14.1-inch, WXGA Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 21.3 cm 28.5 cm 35.8 cm 8.4 in 11.2in 14.1 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 250:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r ma t Configuration 0.279 à 0.279 mm 1024 à 768 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 4.0 W Viewing angle /-40° horizontal, 120/-40° v e r tical typical
6â4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 3 Har d Drives 100-GB* 80-GB* 60-GB* 40-GB* Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g Interface type SA T A SA T A SA T A SA T A T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security 100 MB/sec ATA security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k Ave ra g e Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks â 195,363,650 156,301,488 117,210,240 78,140,160 Disc rotational speed 5400 r pm 5400 r pm 7200 and 5400 r pm 5400 r pm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) â Certain restrictions and exclusi ons apply. Consult Customer Care for details. *1 GB = 1 billion b ytes when ref erring to hard dr iv e storage capacity . Actual accessible capacity is less . â Actual drive specificatio ns ma y diff er slightly .
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â5 Ta b l e 6 - 4 D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: DV D - R , DV D - R W, D VD-ROM (D VD-5, D VD-9, DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) , CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R, CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W D VD-R and DV D - R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
6â6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Spe cificat ion s Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 175 ms < 285 ms < 230 ms < 335 ms A u dio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (16X) CD-R W (8X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) D VD-R (4X) DV D - R W ( 2 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,200 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 5,400 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 2,700 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 4 D VD±R W and CD-R W Combo Drive (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â7 Ta b l e 6 - 5 DV D - R O M D r i v e Applicable disc DV D - R O M ( DV D - 5 , DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 , DV D - 1 8 ) CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R CD-R W Photo CD (single and multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 100 ms < 175 ms < 125 ms < 225 ms A u dio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vrms Cache b uffer 512 KB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 10 seconds Stop time < 3 seconds
6â8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 6 System DMA Hard ware DMA System Function DMA0 Not applicable DMA1* Not applicable DMA2* Not applicable DMA3 Not applicable DMA4 Direct memor y access controller DMA5* A vailab le for PC Card DMA6 Not assigned DMA7 Not assigned *PC Card controller ca n use DMA 1, 2, or 5.
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â9 Ta b l e 6 - 7 System Interrupts Hard ware IRQ System Function IRQ0 System timer IRQ1 Standard 101-/102-K ey or Microsoft Natur al K eyboard IRQ2 Cascaded IRQ3 Intel 82801DB/DBM USB2 Enhanced Host Controllerâ24CD IRQ4 COM1 IRQ5* Cone xant A CâLink A udio Intel 82801DB/DBM SMBus Controllerâ24C3 Data F ax Modem with Smar tCP IRQ6 Diskette driv e IRQ7* P arallel por t IRQ8 System CMOS/real-time clock IRQ9* Microsoft A CPI-compliant system IRQ10* Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C2 Intel 82852/82855 GM/GME Graphic Controller Realtek R TL8139 F amily PCI fast Ethernet Controller
6â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s IRQ11 Intel USB EHCI controllerâ24CD Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C4 Intel USB UHCI controllerâ24C7 Intel Pro/Wireless 2200BG TI OHCI 1394 host controller TI PCI1410 CardBus controller IRQ12 Synaptics PS/2 T o uchP ad IRQ13 Numer ic data processor IRQ14 Pri mar y IDE channel IRQ15 Secondar y IDE channel *Def ault configuration; audio possible configur ations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, or none. â PC Cards may assert IRQ3, IRQ4, IR Q5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or IRQ15. Either the infrared or the se rial port may assert IRQ3 or IRQ4. Ta b l e 6 - 7 System Interrupts (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â11 Ta b l e 6 - 8 System I/O Addresses I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 000 - 00F DMA controller no. 1 010 - 01F Unused 020 - 021 Interrupt controller no . 1 022 - 024 Opti chipset configuration registers 025 - 03F Unused 02E - 02F 87334 âSuper I/Oâ configuration f or CPU 040 - 05F Counter/timer registers 044 - 05F Unused 060 K eyboard controller 061 P or t B 062 - 063 Unused 064 K eyboard controller 065 - 06F Unused 070 - 071 NMI enab le/R TC 072 - 07F Unused 080 - 08F DMA page registers 090 - 091 Unused 092 P or t A 093 - 09F Unused 0A0 - 0A1 Interrupt controller no . 2
6â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 0A2 - 0BF Unused 0C0 - 0DF DMA controller no . 2 0E0 - 0EF Unused 0F0 - 0F1 Coprocessor busy clear/reset 0F2 - 0FF Unused 100 - 16F Unused 170 - 177 Secondar y fix ed disk controller 178 - 1EF Unused 1F0 - 1F7 Primar y fixed disk controller 1F8 - 200 Unused 201 Jo yStick (decoded in ESS1688) 202 - 21F Unused 220 - 22F Enter tainment audio 230 - 26D Unused 26E - 26 Unused 278 - 27F Unused 280 - 2AB Unused 2A0 - 2A7 Unused 2A8 - 2E7 Unused 2E8 - 2EF Reser v ed serial por t Ta b l e 6 - 8 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â13 I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 2F0 - 2F7 Unused 2F8 - 2FF Infrared por t 300 - 31F Unused 320 - 36F Unused 370 - 377 Secondar y diskette driv e controller 378 - 37F P arallel por t (LPT1/defa ult) 380 - 387 Unused 388 - 38B FM synthesizerâOPL3 38C - 3AF Unused 3B0 - 3BB V GA 3BC - 3BF Reser v ed (parallel por t/no EPP suppor t) 3C0 - 3DF V GA 3E0 - 3E1 PC Card controller in CPU 3E2 - 3E3 Unused 3E8 - 3EF Inter nal modem 3F0 - 3F7 âAâ diskette controller 3F8 - 3FF Ser ial por t (COM1/defa ult) CF8 - CFB PCI configuration inde x register (PCIDIV O-1) CFC - CFF PCI configuration data register (PCIDIV O-1) Ta b l e 6 - 8 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
6â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 9 System Memory Map Size Memory Address System Function 640 KB 00000000-0009FFFF Base memor y 128 KB 000A0000-000BFFFF Video memor y 48 KB 000C0000-000CBFFF Video BIOS 160 KB 000C8000-000E7FFF Unused 64 KB 000E8000-000FFFFF System BIOS 15 MB 00100000-00FFFFFF Extended memor y 58 MB 01000000-047FFFFF Super extended memory 58 MB 04800000-07FFFFFF Unused 2 MB 08000000-080FFFFF Video memor y (direct access) 4 GB 08200000-FFFEFFFF Unused 64 KB FFFF0000-FFFFFFFF System BIOS
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ1 A Sc r e w L ist ing This appendix provides specif ication and reference information for the scre ws used in the computer . All scre ws listed in this appendix are a v ailable in the Scre w Kit, spare part number 418878-001, and the Display Scre w Kit, spare part number 418892-001. Phillips P M 3 . 0Ã3. 0 Sc r ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 1 Phillips PM3.0Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 4 3.0 mm 3.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the hard driv e fram e to the hard dr iv e (documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Aâ2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing Phillips P M2 . 0Ã5. 0 Sc re w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 2 Phillips PM2.0Ã5.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 5 5.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo screws that secure the hard driv e cov er to the computer (screws are captured on the cov er by C-clips; documented in Section 5.4 ) 2 One scre w that secures the Bluetooth module cov er to the computer (screw is captured on the cov er by a C-clip; documented in Section 5.6 ) 3 One scre w that secures the memor y module compar tment cov er to the computer (screw is captured on th e co ver b y a C-clip; documented in Section 5.7 ) 4 One scre w that secures the Mini Ca rd module compar tment co ver to the computer (screw is captured on th e co ver b y a C-clip; documented in Section 5.8 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ3 Phillips P M2 . 5Ã13 .0 S cr ew L ocation Ta b l e A - 3 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Spring-Loaded Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 1 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the hard driv e to the computer (screw is captured on the cov er by a C-clip; documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Aâ4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing Phillips P M2 . 5Ã5 . 0 Sc r e w L ocation Ta b l e A - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the MultiBa y II de vice to the computer (documented in Section 5.9 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ5 Phillips P M2 . 5Ã5 . 0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 One scre w that secures the displa y a ssembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) 2 One scre w that secures the top co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Aâ6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing Phillips P M2 . 5Ã5 . 0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 3 screws that secure the PC Card/dig ital media board to the computer (documented in Section 5.22 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ7 Phillips P M2 . 5Ã5 . 0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e A - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the system boar d to the computer (documented in Section 5.25 ) mm
Aâ8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã11.0 S cr e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 5 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã11.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 16 11.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 Three screws that secure the k eyboa rd to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) 2 T wo screws that secure the s witch co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) 3 T wo screws that secure the displa y as sembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ9 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã11.0 S cr e w L ocations Ta b l e A - 5 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã11.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 16 11.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 9 screws that secure the top co ve r to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Aâ10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã6. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 6 Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 5 6.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the modem modu le to the computer (documented in Section 5.13 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ11 Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã6. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 6 Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 5 6.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the system boar d to the computer (documented in Section 5.25 ) mm
Aâ12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã6 . 0 Sc r e w Locati on Ta b l e A - 6 Phillips PM2.0Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 5 6.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the MultiBa y II eject assembly to the base enclosure (documented in Section 5.26 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ13 Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã3. 0 Sc r e w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 7 Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 3.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Mini Card WLAN to the computer (documented in Section 5.8 ) mm
Aâ14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã3. 0 Sc r e w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 7 Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 3.0 mm 2.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Mini Card WW AN to the computer (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ15 Phillips P M 2 . 5Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the po wer button board to the s witch cov er (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
Aâ16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing Phillips P M 2 . 5Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e A - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y hinges to the displa y assembly (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ17 T orx8 T8M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w Locati ons Ta b l e A - 9 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the wireless antenn a tr ansceive rs to the displa y assembly (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Aâ18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing T able A-10 Phillips PM2.5Ã10.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 10.0 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm Where used: 1 F our screws that secure the heat sink to the computer (scre w s are secured to the heat sink by C- clips; documented in Section 5.18 ) T able A-11 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 6.0 mm Where used: 2 T wo screws that secure the heat sink to the comp uter (scre ws are secured to the heat sink by C- clips; documented in Section 5.18 ) mm mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ19 Phillips P M 2 . 5Ã10. 0 and Phillips P M2 . 5Ã13. 0 Sc re w Locati ons
Aâ20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr ew Listing Phillips P M 2 . 0Ã2 . 0 Sc r e w Locati ons T able A-12 Phillips PM2.0Ã2.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 4 2.0 mm 2.0 mm 6.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the s witch co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ21 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locati on T able A-13 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the f an assembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.17 ) mm
Aâ2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locati ons T able A-13 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ2 3 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locati ons T able A-13 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Aâ2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locati on T able A-13 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the top co ve r to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ2 5 T orx8 T8M2 . 5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locati ons T able A-13 T orx8 T8M2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the top co ve r to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Aâ2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing Phillips P M2 . 5Ã6 . 0 Scr ew L ocations T able A-14 Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 8 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the displa y bezel to the displa y assembly (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ2 7 Phillips P M2 . 5Ã6 . 0 Scr ew L ocations T able A-14 Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 8 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y hinges to the displa y assembly (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Aâ2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr ew Listing Phillips P M2 . 5Ã6 . 0 Scr ew L ocations T able A-14 Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 8 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y panel to the displa y assembly (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ1 B Ba ck u p a nd R e c o v e ry Back up HP Backup and Recov ery Manager provides se veral ways to back up the system and to recov er optimal system functionality . â HP installed dri vers, utilities, a nd applications can be copied to a CD or to a D VD using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . â The computer must be connected to external po wer before you perform backup and recov ery procedures. Safeguarding Y our D ata T o safeguard your documents, store personal f iles in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of the folder . B ac kin g Up t he S y s tem Using HP Backup and Restore Manager , you can â Back up specif ic files and folders. â Back up the entire system.
Bâ2 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de Back up and R ecov er y â Back up modif ications since your last backup, using HP system restore points. â Schedule backups. Ba c king Up S pec ific Files or F ol ders Y ou can back up specific f iles or folders to the hard dri ve, to an optional external hard dri ve, or to discs. â This process will take se veral minutes, depending on the f ile size and the speed of the computer . T o back up specific f iles or folders: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up individual f iles and f olders , and then click Next . The Backup W izard opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Backup selected f iles from most common locations (Recommended) . â or â Click Advanced Backup (Experienced users) to access adv anced filtering techniques. 7. Click Next. 8. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Back up and R eco very Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ3 B ac kin g Up t he En tire Hard Driv e When you perform a complete backup of the hard dri ve, you are sa ving the full factory image, including the W indo ws operating system, software applications, and all personal f iles and folders. â A copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve, on a network dri ve, or on reco very discs that you create. â This process may take o ver an hour , depending on your computer speed and the amount of data being stored. T o back up your entire hard dri ve: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Back up entire hard dri ve , and then click Next . The âBack up entire hard diskâ page opens. 5. Click Next. 6. Select the location for the backup f iles, and then click Next . 7. Select the Protect data access with passw ord check box, and type your password in the Passw ord and Conf irm boxes. â This step is optional. If you do not want to password-protect your data access, clear the Protect data access with passw ord check box. 8. Click Next. 9. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ4 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de Back up and R ecov er y Ba c king U p Modifications M ad e to th e Sys t e m When you back up modif ications since your last backup, you are creating system recov ery points. This allows you to sa ve a snapshot of your hard dri ve at a specif ic point in time. Y ou can then recov er back to that point if you want to re verse subsequent changes made to your system. â The f irst system recov ery point, a snapshot of the entire image, is automatically created the f irst time you perform a backup. Subsequent recov ery points make a copy of changes made after that time. HP recommends that you create recov ery points â Before you add or extensi vely modify softw are or hardware. â Periodically , whene ver the system is performing optimally . â Recov ering to an earlier recov ery point does not af fect data f iles or e-mails created since that recov ery point. After you create a recov ery point, you are prompted to schedule subsequent recov ery points. Y ou can schedule recovery points for a specif ic time or e vent in your system. T o create and schedule a system recov ery point: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Back up to protect system settings and important data f iles , and then click Next . 4. Click Create or manage Reco very Points , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Point Managerâ page opens. 5. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Back up and R eco very Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ5 Sc heduling Ba c k ups T o schedule backups: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup Scheduler . The âBackup Schedulerâ page opens. 2. Click Next. 3. Schedule system recov ery points at specific interv als (now , daily , weekly , or monthly) or at specif ic e vents, such as at system start or when you dock to an optional docking station (select computer models only), by clicking one of the a v ailable options. Click Next to further def ine the settings. A summary of your system recov ery point settings is displayed. 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Rec o ver y HP Backup and Recov ery Manager analyzes the hard driv e and creates a dedicated hard dri ve rec ov ery partition on the hard driv e large enough to store a cop y of the full factory image. Y ou can choose whether you want to store that cop y on the recov ery partition, on another dri ve, or on external reco very discs. â Before using HP Backup and Recov ery Manager , try repairing the system by running Microsoft W indows System Restore. For more information, select Start > Help and Support , and then search for âSystem Restore. â HP Backup and Recov ery Manager allows you to â Cr eate reco very discs (highly r ecommended). The recov ery discs are used to start up your computer and to recov er the full factory image (operating system and software) in case of system f ailure or instability .
Bâ6 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de Back up and R ecov er y â If you do not ha ve a CD or D VD burner , a copy of the entire hard dri ve image can be stored on another hard dri ve or on a network dri ve. â P erf orm a recov ery . Y ou can perform a full system recov e ry or recov er important files from the reco very partition on the hard dri ve, from another dri ve, or from recov ery discs that you create. Creating Reco v er y Disc s (Hi ghly R ecommen ded) After setting up the computer for the f irst time, you can create a set of recov ery discs of the full factory image, using Recov ery Media Creator in the HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . The recov ery discs are used to start up (boot) the computer and recov er the operating system and software to factory settings in case of system failure or instability . à CA UTION: After y ou cr eate the reco ve ry disc s, y ou can incr ease the amount of a vailable space o n the hard dr iv e by de leting the r ecov ery partition . How ev er , doing this is no t r ecommended. If y ou delete this partition , y ou will lo se an y infor mation that is on the partition . â Only one set of recov ery discs can be created for this computer . Before creating recov ery discs: â Obtain high-quality CD-R, D VD-R, or D VD R media, purchased separately . â Formatted D VD±R W discs and D VD±R W double-layer discs are not compatible with HP Backup and Recov ery Manager .
Back up and R eco very Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ7 â Number each disc before inserting it into the optical dri ve of the computer . â If necessary , you can cancel Recov ery Media Creator before you ha ve f inished creating the recov ery discs. The next time you open Recov ery Media Creator , you will be prompted to continue the disc creation process where you left of f. T o create a set of recov ery discs: 1. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 2. Click Next. 3. Click Create factory softwar e reco very CDs or D VDs to r ecover the system (Highly r ecommended) , and then click Next . The âRecov ery Media Creatorâ page opens. 4. Click Next. 5. Click Write to CD/D VD , and then click Next . 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Pe r f o r m i n g a R e c o v e r y P er forming a Reco v er y from t he Reco v er y Dis cs T o perform a recov ery from the recovery discs: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Insert the f irst recov ery disc into the optical driv e and restart the computer . 3. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Bâ8 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de Back up and R ecov er y P er forming a Reco v er y from t he H ard Driv e There are 2 ways to initiate a reco very from the hard dri ve: â From within W indo ws. â From the recov ery partition. Initia ting a Reco ve r y in Windo w s T o initiate a recov ery in W i ndo ws: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Select Start > All Pr ograms > HP Backup & Recovery > HP Backup and Recov ery Manager . 3. Click Next. 4. Click Recov er important f iles or the entir e system , and then click Next . 5. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . â If you choose to recov er the system, the computer restarts and recov ery begins. 6. Follo w the on-screen instructions. Initia ting a Reco v er y from the H ard Driv e Reco v er y P ar tition T o initiate a recov ery from the hard driv e recovery partition: 1. Back up all personal f iles. 2. Restart the computer , and then press f11 before the W indo ws operating system loads. 3. Click a recov ery option, and then click Next . 4. Follo w the on-screen instructions.
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ1 C Dis pl a y C om ponen t Rec y c lin g à W ARNI NG: The bac klight contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e xe r cis ed whe n r emo v i ng and handling the bac klight t o av oid damaging this component and ca using e xposure to the me r c ury . à CA UTION: The pr ocedur es in this appendi x can re sult in damage to displa y components . The only compo nents intended f or rec yc ling purpo ses ar e the liqui d cry stal displa y (L CD) panel and the bac klight . Car eful handling should be e xer ci sed when r emo ving these components . â Materials Disposal This HP product contains mercury in the backlight in the display assembly that might require special handling at end-of-life. Disposal of mercury may be regulated because of en vironmental considerations. For disposal or rec ycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www .eiae.org .
Câ2 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling This appendix provides disassembl y instructions for the display assembly . The display assembly must be disassembled to gain access to the backlight 1 and the liquid crystal display (LCD) panel 2. â Disassembly procedures dif fer from one display assembly to another . The procedures provided in this appendix are general disassembly instructions. Specif ic details, such as scre w sizes, quantities, and locations, and co mponent shapes and sizes, can v ary from one computer model to another .
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ3 Perform the follo wing steps to disassemble the display assembly: 1. Remov e all screw co vers 1 and scre ws 2 that secure the display bezel to the display assembly . R emo v i ng the Displa y Bez el Scr ew C ov ers and Sc re ws
Câ4 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling 2. Lift up and out on the left and right inside edges 1 and the top and bottom inside edges 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages fro m the display assembly . 3. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v i ng the Displa y Bez el
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ5 4. Disconnect all display panel cables 1 from the display in verter and remo ve the in v erter 2 . R emo v ing the Displa y Inv erter
Câ6 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling 5. Remov e all screws 1 that secure the display panel assembly to the display enclosure. 6. Remov e the display panel assembly 2 from the display enclosure. R emo v i ng the Displa y P anel Ass embl y
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ7 7. T urn the display panel assembly upside do wn. 8. Remov e all screws that secure the display panel frame to the display panel. R emo v ing the Displa y P anel F r ame Sc r e ws
Câ8 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling 9. Use a sharp-edged tool to cut the tape 1 that secures the sides of the display panel to the display panel frame. 10. Remov e the display panel frame 2 from the display panel. R emo v i ng the Displa y F r ame
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ9 11. Remov e the screws 1 that secure the backlight co ver to the display panel. 12. Lift the top edge of the backlight cov er 2 and swing it forward. 13. Remov e the backlight cove r . R emo v i ng the Bac klight C ov er
Câ10 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling 14. T urn the display panel right-side up. 15. Remov e the backlight cables 1 from the clip 2 in the display panel. R eleasing the Bac klight Cable s
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ11 16. T urn the display panel upside do wn. 17. Remov e the backlight frame from the display panel. R emo v i ng the Bac klight F r ame
Câ12 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling à W ARNI NG: The bac klight contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e xe r cis ed whe n r emo v i ng and handling the bac klight t o av oid damaging this component and ca using e xposure to the me r c ury . 18. Slide the backlight out of the backlight frame. R emo v i ng the Bac klight
Displa y Componen t Rec yc ling Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ13 19. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the LCD panel. 20. Remov e the screws 2 that secure the LCD panel to the display rear panel. 21. Release the LCD panel 3 from the display rear panel. 22. Release the tape 4 that secures the LCD panel to the display rear panel. R eleasing the L CD P anel
Câ14 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent Recy cling 23. Remov e the LCD panel. R emo v ing the L CD P anel 24. Recycle the LCD panel and backlight.
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ1 D Co nnec tor P in A ssi gnm ents Ta b l e D - 1 A udio-Out (Headphone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio out, left channel 3 Ground 2 A udio out, r ight channel
Dâ2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 2 A udio-In (Microphone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio signal in 3 Ground 2 A udio signal in Ta b l e D - 3 Universal Serial Bus Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 5 VDC 3 Data 2 Data â 4 Ground
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ3 Ta b l e D - 4 S-Video-Out Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 S-VHS color (C) signal 5 TV -CD 2 Composite video signal 6 S-VHS intensity ground 3 S-VHS intensity (Y) signal 7 Composite video ground 4 S-VHS color ground
Dâ4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 5 External Monitor Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Red analog 9 5 VDC 2 Green analog 10 Ground 3 Blue analog 11 Monitor detect 4 Not connected 12 DDC 2B data 5 Ground 13 Horizontal sync 6 Ground analog 14 V er tical sync 7 Ground analog 15 DDC 2B cloc k 8 Ground analog
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ5 Ta b l e D - 6 RJ-11 (Modem) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Unused 4 Unused 2T i p 5U n u s e d 3 Ring 6 Unused
Dâ6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e D - 7 RJ-45 (Netw ork) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 T ransmit 5 Unused 2 T ransmit â 6 Receiv e â 3 Receiv e 7 Unused 4 Unused 8 Unused
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Eâ1 E P o w er Cord S et Requirements 3-Con duc tor P o w er C ord Set The wide range input feature of the computer permits it to operate from any line v oltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts A C. The po wer cord set included with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment is purchased. Po wer cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where the computer is used.
Eâ2 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de P ow er Cord Set R equirements Gen eral R equiremen ts The requirements listed belo w are applicable to all countries. â The length of the po wer cord set must be at least 1.5 m (5.0 ft) and a maximum of 2.0 m (6.5 ft). â All po wer cord sets must be approved b y an acceptable accredited agency responsible for e v aluation in the country where the po wer cord set will be used. â The po wer cord sets must hav e a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal v oltage rating of 125 or 250 V A C, as required by each countryâ s power system. â The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conf iguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the ap pliance inlet on the back of the computer .
P ow er Cor d Set Requir ement s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Eâ3 Coun tr y-Spec ifi c Requirements 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number A ustralia EANSW 1 Au s t r i a OV E 1 Belgium C EBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark DEMK O 1 Finland FIMK O 1 F rance UTE 1 Ger many VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Jap a n ME T I 3 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord must be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wa ll plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord must be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug m ust be a two-pole g rounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and w all plug must bear a âTâ mark and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentori Law . The fle xible cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration.
Eâ4 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de P ow er Cord Set R equirements Ko r e a E K 4 The Netherlands KEMA 1 Norwa y NEMK O 1 P eopleâ s Republic of China CCC 5 Sweden SEMK O 1 Switzerland SEV 1 T aiwan BSMI 4 United Kingdom BSI 1 United States UL 2 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord must be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wa ll plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord must be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug m ust be a two-pole g rounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xible cord, and w all plug must bear a âTâ mark and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentori Law . The fle xible cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 4. The fle xible cord must be T ype R VV , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size. P ow er cord set fittings (appliance co upler and wall plug) m ust bear the cer tification mar k of the agency resp onsible f or e valuation in the countr y where it will be used. 5. The fle xible cord must be T ype VC TF , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ow er cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug) m ust bear the cer tification mar k of the agency respon sible f or e valuation in the countr y where it will be used. 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements (Continued) Country/Region Accredited Ag ency Applicable Note Number
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ1 In de x A AC adapter, spare part numbers 3â22 , 3â29 accessory battery connector 1â22 arrow keys 1â15 audio cable illustrated 3â20 removal 5â71 audio troubleshooting 2â21 audio-in jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 audio-out jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ1 B base enclosure, spare part number 3â7, 3â29 battery removal 5â6 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â28 , 5â6 battery bay 1â13, 1â22 battery light 1â7 battery release latch 1â22 Bluetooth module removal 5â12 spare part number 3â15, 3â27 , 5â12 Bluetooth module cable illustrated 3â20 removal 5â71 Bluetooth module cover illustrated 3â19 removal 5â12 bottom components 1â22 C Cable Kit contents 3â20 spare part number 3â5 , 3â20 , 3â29 cables, service considerations 4â2 caps lock key 1â15 caps lock light 1â19 carrying case, spare part number 3â22, 3â25 CMOS clearing 1â4 components bottom 1â22 front 1â6 keyboard 1â12, 1â14
Inde xâ2 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde x left-side 1â10 rear 1â10 right-side 1â8 top 1â16, 1â18, 1â20 computer feet illustrated 3â19 locations 5â11 Computer Setup Advanced Menu 2â5 Diagnostics Menu 2â4 File Menu 2â2 overview 2â1 Security Menu 2â3 computer specifications 6â1 connector pin assignments audio-in Dâ2 audio-out Dâ1 external monitor Dâ4 headphone Dâ1 microphone Dâ2 modem Dâ5 monitor Dâ4 network Dâ6 RJ-11 Dâ5 RJ-45 Dâ6 S-Video-out Dâ3 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Dâ2 connectors, service considerations 4â2 D design overview 1â24 Digital Media Slot 1â7 disassembly sequence chart 5â3 diskette drive OS loading problems 2â19 precautions 4â3 spare part number 3â25 display assembly removal 5â44 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â30 , 5â44 display bezel illustrated 3â16 removal 5â50 spare part number 3â17, 3â29 , 5â48 , 5â50 Display Bracket Kit, spare part number 3â17, 3â30, 5â48 Display Cable Kit, spare part number 3â17, 3â30, 5â48 display component recycling Câ1 display enclosure illustrated 3â16 spare part number 3â17, 3â30 , 5â48 , 5â50 display hinge illustrated 3â16 removal 5â51 Display Hinge Kit, spare part number 3â17, 3â30, 5â48, 5â51 display inverter illustrated 3â16 removal 5â53 spare part number 3â17, 3â29 , 5â48 , 5â53
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ3 display panel illustrated 3â16 removal 5â52 spare part numbers 3â17, 3â30 , 5â48 , 5â52 display release button 1â7 Display Rubber Kit, spare part number 3â30 Display Screw Kit, spare part number 3â17, 3â30, 5â48 docking connector 1â22 drive light 1â7 drives, preventing damage 4â3 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive spare part number 3â28 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â21 spare part number 3â9, 3â21 , 3â28 , 5â21 specifications 6â5, 6â7 DVD-ROM drive precautions 4â3 removal 5â21 spare part number 3â9, 3â21 , 3â22 , 3â28 , 5â21 specifications 6â7 E electrostatic discharge 4â4, 4â8 exhaust vents 1â11 expansion product spare part number 3â22 troubleshooting 2â14 external monitor port location 1â13 pin assignments Dâ4 External MultiBay II power cable and stand, spare part number 3â22, 3â25 External MultiBay II, spare part number 3â22, 3â25 F f1 to f12 keys 1â15 fan assembly removal 5â38 spare part number 3â7 , 3â29 , 5â38 features 1â2 feet illustrated 3â19 locations 5â11 fingerprint reader 1â19 flowcharts, troubleshooting no audio 2â21, 2â22 no network/modem connection 2â26 no OS loading 2â15 no OS loading from diskette drive 2â19 no OS loading from hard drive 2â16, 2â17, 2â18 no OS loading from optical drive 2â20 no power 2â8, 2â10, 2â11 no video 2â12, 2â13 nonfunctioning device 2â23
Inde xâ4 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde x nonfunctioning docking device 2â14 nonfunctioning keyboard 2â24 nonfunctioning pointing device 2â25 fn key 1â15 front components 1â6 G grounding equipment and methods 4â7 H hard drive OS loading problems 2â16 precautions 4â3 removal 5â7 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â21 , 3â28 , 5â7 specifications 6â4 hard drive bay 1â23 hard drive cover illustrated 3â19 removal 5â8 headphone jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ1 heat sink removal 5â39 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â29 , 3â32 , 5â39 HP Docking Station, spare part number 3â22, 3â25 HP Extended Life Battery, spare part number 3â22, 3â25 I I/O address specifications 6â11 Info Center button 1â17 infrared port 1â7 interrupt specifications 6â9 K keyboard removal 5â23 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â30 , 3â31 , 3â32 , 5â23 troubleshooting 2â24 keyboard components 1â12, 1â14 keypad 1â15 L Label Kit, spare part number 3â22 , 3â29 LED board, spare part number 3â7 , 3â30 left-side components 1â10 M mass storage devices, spare part numbers 3â21 memory map specifications 6â14 memory module removal 5â14, 5â29 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â27 , 3â28 , 5â14 , 5â29 memory module compartment 1â23
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ5 memory module compartment cover illustrated 3â19 removal 5â15 microphone removal 5â66, 5â67 spare part number 3â5, 3â30 , 5â66 microphone jack location 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 Mini Card compartment 1â23 Mini Card module compartment cover illustrated 3â19 removal 5â19 Mini Card WLAN module removal 5â17 spare part numbers 3â11, 3â13 , 3â15 , 3â26 , 3â27 , 5â17 Mini Card WWAN module removal 5â33 spare part number 3â5, 3â28 , 5â33 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit (for use with docking device), spare part number 3â22, 3â25 modem jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ5 modem module spare part number 3â5, 3â27 , 5â31 troubleshooting 2â26 modem module cable illustrated 3â20 removal 5â72 monitor port location 1â13 pin assignments Dâ4 MultiBay II device 1â9 removal 5â21 spare part numbers 5â21 MultiBay II eject assembly removal 5â77 spare part number 3â7 , 3â30 , 5â77 N network jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ6 network, troubleshooting 2â26 nonfunctioning device, troubleshooting 2â14, 2â23 num lock key 1â15 num lock light 1â19 O optical drive OS loading problems 2â20 precautions 4â3 removal 5â21 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â21 , 3â22 , 5â21 specifications 6â5, 6â7 P packing precautions 4â5 password clearing 1â4
Inde xâ6 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde x PC Card slot bezel, illustrated 3â19 PC Card slots 1â11 PC Card/digital media board removal 5â61 spare part number 3â5, 3â29 , 5â61 plastic parts 4â2 Plastics Kit contents 3â19 spare part number 3â5, 3â19 , 3â29 pointing device, troubleshooting 2â25 pointing stick 1â21 pointing stick buttons 1â21 pointing stick cable, illustrated 3â20 power button 1â17 power button board removal 5â37 spare part number 3â3, 3â30 , 5â37 power connector 1â13 power cord set requirements Eâ2 spare part numbers 3â23, 3â25 power light 1â6 , 1â19 power management features 1â5 power, troubleshooting 2â8 presentation button 1â17 processor removal 5â42 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â28 , 3â29 , 5â42 R rear components 1â10 removal/replacement preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 right-side components 1â8 RJ-11 jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ5 RJ-45 jack location 1â9 pin assignments Dâ6 RTC battery removal 5â28 spare part number 3â5 , 3â29 S Screw Kit contents Aâ1 spare part number 3â24, 3â29 , Aâ1 screw listing Aâ1 security cable slot 1â13 serial number 1â23, 3â1, 5â2 service considerations 4â2 smart card slot 1â9 speaker location 1â7 removal 5â64 spare part number 3â7 , 3â29 , 5â64
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ7 specifications computer 6â1 DVD±RW and CD-RW Combo Drive 6â5, 6â7 DVD-ROM drive 6â7 hard drive 6â4 I/O addresses 6â11 interrupts 6â9 memory map 6â14 optical drive 6â5, 6â7 system DMA 6â8 static shielding materials 4â8 stringent security 1â4 S-Video-out jack location 1â13 pin assignments Dâ3 switch cover removal 5â35 spare part number 3â3, 3â30 , 5â35 system board removal 5â68 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â30 , 3â32 , 5â68 system DMA 6â8 system memory map 6â14 T thermal pads, replacing 5â41 thermal paste, replacing 5â41 tools required 4â1 top components 1â16, 1â18, 1â20 top cover removal 5â55 spare part number 3â5 , 3â29 , 5â55 TouchPad 1â21 TouchPad cable, illustrated 3â20 TouchPad left/right buttons 1â21 TouchPad scroll zone 1â21 transporting precautions 4â5 troubleshooting audio 2â21 Computer Setup 2â1 expansion product 2â14 flowcharts 2â6 keyboard 2â24 modem 2â26 network 2â26 nonfunctioning device 2â14 , 2â23 OS loading 2â15 overview 2â1 pointing device 2â25 power 2â8 video 2â12 U Universal Serial Bus (USB) diskette drive, spare part number 3â24 Universal Serial Bus (USB) port location 1â9, 1â11 pin assignments Dâ2 unknown password 1â4
Inde xâ8 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde x V vents 1â23 video troubleshooting 2â12 volume buttons 1â17 W Windows applications key 1â15 Windows logo key 1â15 wireless antenna illustrated 3â16 removal 5â54 Wireless Antenna Kit, spare part number 3â17, 3â30, 5â48 , 5â54 wireless button 1â17 wireless light 1â6, 1â17, 1â19 workstation precautions 4â6